JP7143363B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player.

A game machine such as a pachinko game machine has been proposed that is capable of executing a black-and-white mode effect that determines whether or not a color-to-monochrome (black-and-white) preview effect changes from color to monochrome (black-and-white), and a black-and-white mode effect in which the background image is monochrome. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-2224 A

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, the production becomes monotonous, and there is room for improvement in improving the entertainment.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of a game through presentation.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. Then, a special effect executing means (for example, steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a color change effect, etc.) for changing a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time from normal colors to common special colors is executed. CPU77AK131, etc.), reserved storage means for storing information on variable display as a reserved memory, and specific display means for performing specific display corresponding to the variable display being executed, wherein the reserved display means executes the special effect. is displayed in a special color, and the specific display means can execute the specific display in a manner related to the reserved display corresponding to the variable display when the variable display is started, and usually As a color, a specific display can be displayed by the first mode and a second mode that is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode, and the specific display of the first mode is the special effect. When executed, it is displayed in a special color, and the specific display of the second mode is displayed while maintaining the second mode when the special effect is executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the pending display and the specific display, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the various circuits mounted in the production|presentation control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production|presentation control command. It is a figure which shows the execution example of a step-up notice. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of execution of story announcement; It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a pending|holding display data storage part. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of pre-reading notice setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution when color change production|presentation is not performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect execution when monochrome change is executed; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution when gold color change is performed. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a battle zone production|presentation determination process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the advance notice during all pattern fluctuation|variation, and the advance notice after establishment of a ready-to-win state. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example when a battle zone production|presentation is started. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of timing control; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example corresponding to a variable display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect display. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of color change synthesis processing; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case rocking production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case rocking production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case rocking production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution where a suspension display and an active display are performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example which makes a game effect lamp light. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example which light-emits a game effect lamp, and a light emission priority. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the setting example and determination example regarding swing production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control regarding color change production|presentation and rocking|fluctuation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect display. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect execution example when a color recovery effect is executed; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect execution example when a color recovery effect is executed; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect execution example when a color recovery effect is executed; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect execution example when a color recovery effect is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect execution when both the color recovery effect and the message display color notice are executed. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of a color recovery pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination when determining the type of color restoration effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining a color restoration pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determining a color restoration pattern; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the example of control regarding the color restoration production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case re-change production|presentation is performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect execution example regarding a modification when a color change effect is started;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, there is provided a ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls to the first and second big prize openings (attackers). Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls won by winning the 2nd starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big prize mouth and the 2nd big prize mouth (attacker) account for the total number of prize balls. percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in an off state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is established in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the setting is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It designates the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is detected. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The process during the small hit opening of step S119 is performed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, the interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. After that, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small winning end production process is ended.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

(Description of characteristic part regarding setting suggestion effect)
During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate. For example, the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process includes a stop symbol determination process. The stop symbol determination process may be a process capable of determining a combination of decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decoration symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decoration symbols. In the stop symbol determination process, when the super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is executed, it may be determined that the setting suggesting effect can be executed at a predetermined rate based on the determination of any ready-to-win symbol. The ready-to-win pattern is the same decoration pattern stopped and displayed in accordance with the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R among the final stop pattern at the time of the ready-to-win failure and the final stop pattern at the time of the big win.

In the stop pattern determination process, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win pattern can be determined by referring to a ready-to-win pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win pattern. . The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the ready-to-win pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "loss" or "big win". For example, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is the highest, and the number 6, the number 5, As the number 4, the number 3, and the number 2 become, the variable display result in the case of stop display as a ready-to-win pattern becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state decreases, corresponding to the number 1. Even if the determination ratio of the decorative pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is set so that the variable display result when the decorative pattern to be the winning pattern is stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern is "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is the lowest. good. In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big hit", the same number of determination values may be assigned to decorative patterns to be ready-to-win symbols. The number of determination values assigned to each decorative design to be a ready-to-win pattern may be different, or the number of determination values to be assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative design to be a ready-to-win design. Depending on the type of jackpot, the determination ratio of decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ.

In the stop symbol determination process, when the determined ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined whether or not to perform the setting suggestion effect. Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As the presence/absence of the setting suggesting effect, one of "no effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed, or "with effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is executed is determined. At this time, when it is determined that "there is an effect", the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . The set value may be specified using the stored data in such a predetermined area.

When the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, the setting suggestion pattern is determined. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . For example, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 may be provided as a plurality of suggested setting patterns. These setting suggestion patterns may have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not the pattern display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

When the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. Something is certain. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is high, and when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-3, the set value is the highest. 6 is determined. In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A symbol display mode for suggesting the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 while suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as decoration symbols corresponding to the numbers is included. When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

The setting-suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern display color is not changed to copper because the pattern RE-1 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed to copper color or not. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the pattern display color is not changed to gold because the pattern RE-3 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is changed to gold as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

The setting suggesting effect is to change the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, instead of changing the symbol display color, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of a background image, an outer frame image, and other arbitrary effect images, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of the movable members for effects, and the like. It may be one that changes the rendering mode by any rendering device, such as a combination of some or all. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for effect execution. It suffices if it can be executed when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of suggested setting patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display It may be possible to make the decision possible only when the result is a "big hit" and to make the decision impossible when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the setting values used.

In the effect process during variable display executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, when it is the change effect period, control to execute the change effect is performed. The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. The change effect period may be set to different time lengths according to the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a portable terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as Networking Service and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the effect (unfavorable effect) that is often performed even in a disadvantageous situation does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effect is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect that is advantageous to the player, and to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the images including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game arcade side.

The setting suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by any desired effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a pre-reading notice effect, in addition to a change effect in which the display color of the ready-to-win pattern can be changed, and the set value of the pachinko game machine 1. You may enable it to make a suggestion about. It may be an effect in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested after the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is performed during execution of the variable display. In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state is continuously made after making the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state, or the suggestion concerning the control of the big win game state is continuously made and the pachinko game is performed. It may also include a case of suggesting a set value of the gaming machine 1 . In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion about the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion about the control of the big win game state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is made. It may include a case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different decision ratios depending on whether or not the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

During execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the pachinko machine executes a big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and a big hit effect (such as a effect corresponding to the first and second rounds). A setting value of 1 may be suggested. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot game state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may be one that suggests a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 77AK to 79AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 77AK100, an input circuit 77AK121, a memory controller 77AK122, a production data memory 77AK123, a ROM77AK124, a RAM77AK125, and a watchdog timer 77AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 77AK100 includes a CPU 77AK131, a VDP 77AK132, a voice processing circuit 77AK133, a lamp control circuit 77AK134, a motor control circuit 77AK135, and a built-in memory 77AK136. The VDP 77AK132 includes a data transfer circuit 77AK141, a preloader 77AK142, a graphics decoder 7AK143, a drawing circuit 77AK144, a VRAM 77AK145, and a display drive circuit 77AK146. The audio processing circuit 77AK133 includes an audio decoder 77AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 77AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It is possible to control the execution of an effect using some or all of a plurality of effect devices such as the LED for the effect and the movable member for effect such as the movable body 32 . The production control microprocessor 77AK100 may be configured as an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling execution of production is integrated on one chip. In addition, the production control microprocessor 77AK100 includes a CPU77AK131, a VDP77AK132, and a built-in memory 77AK136. It may be provided outside the 77AK100. Alternatively, part or all of the input circuit 77AK121, memory controller 77AK122, effect data memory 77AK123, ROM77AK124, RAM77AK125, and watchdog timer 77AK126 may be provided inside the one-chip effect control microprocessor 77AK100.

The input circuit 77AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 77AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 77AK122 executes various processes including reading and writing of data stored in the effect data memory 77AK123 in response to request signals supplied from the effect control microprocessor 77AK100. The effect data memory 77AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 77AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, if sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is prepared. good. These sprite image data can be used as character image data. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 77AK123. It is good if there is. As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. The still image data includes planar still image data capable of generating a still image corresponding to a two-dimensional plane, and stereoscopic image data capable of generating a stereoscopic image, which is a still image corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space. good too.

In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 77AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 77AK123 may store part or all of the lamp driving data used for lighting driving of the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The performance data memory 77AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 77AK123 may include a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, even a non-volatile semiconductor memory is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which the progress of the presentation is controlled.

ROM77AK124 comprises the program memory which memorize|stores computer programs, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. The ROM77AK124 may have the same configuration and functions as those of the ROM121. The RAM 77AK 125 is configured using, for example, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) and provides a work area to the CPU 77AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 77AK 100 . Also, the RAM 77AK125 provides a storage area that can temporarily store data read from the performance data memory 77AK123. The RAM77AK125 may have the same configuration and functions as the RAM122. When the program in the CPU77AK131 goes out of control, the watchdog timer 77AK126 forcibly resets the CPU77AK131 and restarts the effect control microprocessor 77AK100.

The ROM 77AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the computer program for the performance control. For example, in the ROM77AK124, the CPU77AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 77AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is list data in which a series of commands to be executed by the VDP77AK132 are described according to the order of drawing processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. Alternatively, while the display list includes the command group for display control, some or all of the command group for voice control, the lamp control command group, and the motor control command group are , may be included in a command list or list data different from the display list. The VDP77AK132 only needs to be able to cooperatively control electrical components for presentation using a display list, other command list or data list. The RAM 77AK 125 only needs to be able to temporarily store programs and various data used to control electrical components for presentation.

CPU77AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 77AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 77AK 124 . The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data read process in which the CPU77AK131 reads out fixed data from the ROM77AK124, a variable data write process in which the CPU77AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM77AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various data temporarily stored in the RAM77AK125 by the CPU77AK131. fluctuation data read processing for reading out fluctuation data, reception processing for the CPU 77AK131 to receive input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for the CPU 77AK131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing. good too. CPU77AK131 should just be provided with the structure and function similar to CPU120 for production|presentation control.

The VDP 77AK 132 determines control details for image display in the image display device 5 based on the display list and register settings from the CPU 77AK 131 . For example, the VDP 77AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays. The VDP77AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP77AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The VDP 77AK 132 may have the same configuration and functions as the VDP included in the display control unit 123 .

The data transfer circuit 77AK141 can control various data transmission/reception by the VDP77AK132. Data transmission/reception by VDP77AK132 should just include data transmission/reception between the internal circuits of the performance control microprocessor 77AK100 and data transmission/reception between the performance control microprocessor 77AK100 and an external device. The internal circuit of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100 capable of controlling data transmission/reception by the data transfer circuit 77AK141 may include, for example, a built-in memory 77AK136, a VRAM77AK145, or one or both of these. The external device of the effect control microprocessor 77AK100 capable of controlling data transmission/reception by the data transfer circuit 77AK141 may include, for example, effect data memory 77AK123, RAM77AK125, or one or both of these.

The preloader 77AK142 can analyze the display list, read the referenced image data from the effect data memory 77AK123, and transfer it to the external RAM77AK125 or internal VRAM77AK145. When such transfer is performed, the preloader 77AK142 outputs a display list in which the reference destination of the image data is rewritten to the post-transfer address. Random access to the effect data memory 77AK123 occurs while the drawing circuit 77AK144 is executing the drawing process. descend. Therefore, the preloader 77AK142 transfers image data and display lists to the external RAM 77AK125 and the internal VRAM 77AK145 in advance, so that drawing processing and the like can be executed at high speed.

The graphics decoder 77AK143 receives moving image data from among the image data read out from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like, separates it into video data and audio data, and then decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data. and output. The video data output from the graphics decoder 77AK143 is supplied to the rendering circuit 77AK144. The audio data separated from the moving image data is supplied to the audio decoder 77AK151 of the audio processing circuit 77AK133. The graphics decoder 77AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the rendering circuit 77AK144.

The drawing circuit 77AK144 can read the display list and execute drawing processing according to the order in which the command group is described. The rendering circuit 77AK144 may include, for example, a display list analysis section, a geometry pipeline, a triangle rasterizer, a texture sampler, a frame buffer sampler, a pixel generation section, and the like. The display list analysis unit analyzes the drawing command of the display list. The geometry pipeline performs vertex transformations and lighting operations. The triangle rasterizer generates source and destination addresses when rendering triangles. A texture sampler samples textures and performs bilinear filtering. The framebuffer sampler obtains the framebuffer and Z-buffer used for inter-pixel operations. The pixel generator performs image processing such as alpha blending to generate pixel data to be written to the frame buffer.

The drawing commands described in the display list are control commands, index table control commands, environment setting commands, texture setting commands, inter-pixel operation commands, special commands, primitive drawing commands, texture load commands, tertiary It suffices if it can be classified as an original drawing command. The control system command is a group of commands for controlling drawing. Index table control commands are a group of commands for controlling and managing index tables. The index table is set corresponding to a plurality of index spaces constructed in the storage area of the VRAM77AK145, and enables management of the indexes allocated to each index space. The environment setting commands are a group of commands for setting the execution environment for drawing processing. Texture setting commands are a group of commands for setting textures. Inter-pixel calculation system commands are a group of commands for controlling calculations between pixels. A special command is a group of commands for special control. Primitive drawing commands are a group of commands for controlling drawing processing using a plane image. The texture load commands are a group of commands for controlling texture loading to the VRAM77AK145. The 3D drawing commands are a group of commands for controlling drawing processing using a stereoscopic image.

The VRAM 77AK145 is a data memory from which data can be read and written by some or all of the data transfer circuit 77AK141, graphics decoder 77AK143, drawing circuit 77AK144, and display drive circuit 77AK146. The VRAM 77AK145 can store video data decompressed and decoded by the graphics decoder 77AK143. The VRAM 77AK145 can also store palette data used for drawing processing by the drawing circuit 77AK144. The VRAM77AK145 can set a frame buffer and a Z buffer used for drawing processing. In addition, the VRAM77AK145 can store display lists for drawing, compression-encoded lamp driving data, and the like. A plurality of spaces for storing data can be constructed in the VRAM77AK145. These spaces become index spaces. The data transfer circuit 77AK141, the graphics decoder 77AK143, the drawing circuit 77AK144, and the display drive circuit 77AK146 may specify the index space and read and write data.

Each of the plurality of index spaces may be secured as any one of the arbitrary area, page area, and active area control area. An arbitrary area can set a top address and a horizontal size to secure an index space in an arbitrary area of the VRAM77AK145. For example, the arbitrary area can secure the index space by designating the base address in the VRAM77AK145 in units of 2048 bits and by designating the horizontal size of the two-dimensional space in units of 256 bits. The page area has a unit space of, for example, 4096 horizontal lines and 128 vertical lines, and index spaces can be secured in multiples of the unit space. For image data stored in the arbitrary area or page area, it is possible to set the index number to be accessed when a drawing command that writes parameters to the index table or a drawing command that obtains parameters from the index table is executed. can. The active area control area can automatically set the start address and horizontal size to secure the index space. The active area control area can automatically set the start address and horizontal size when a drawing command for transferring texture data to the VRAM77AK145 is executed. An index number is automatically assigned in the active area control area.

For example, once the display frame buffer and the corresponding Z buffer are set, they are less likely to change dynamically, so it is suitable to provide them in an arbitrary area. On the other hand, the drawing frame buffer and the corresponding Z buffer may change in size dynamically. Therefore, if the frequency of dynamic change is high, it is suitable to provide it in the page area. On the other hand, if the size is approximately the same over a plurality of frames, it is suitable to provide it in an arbitrary area. Moving image data without palette data or inter-frame reference, or video data decompressed and decoded by the graphics decoder 77AK143 only needs to be guaranteed to exist in the VRAM 77AK145. It is suitable to store in an area. Depending on the degree to which the size of video data with inter-frame references changes dynamically, it may be appropriate to store it in an arbitrary area (if it is difficult to change) or in the page area. There is a case (if it is easy to change).

A frame buffer such as a display frame buffer or a drawing frame buffer provides a virtual drawing space in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP77AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is based on, for example, vector format image data (vector data, vector data) configured using primitives such as points, lines, and polygons including triangles. bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by . A drawing area can be set in the virtual drawing space of the frame buffer, and by setting base point coordinates and diagonal point coordinates in the virtual drawing space, clipping is performed in the drawing area, which is the range to be actually drawn.

The display drive circuit 77AK146 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 77AK146 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP77AK132. do it.

The audio processing circuit 77AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP 77AK132, compression-encoded audio data, and the like. The audio data output from the graphics decoder 77AK143 of the VDP 77AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 77AK151 of the audio processing circuit 77AK133. The audio decoder 77AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. The audio processing circuit 77AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The voice data memory may be included, for example, in the performance data memory 77AK123 or the external ROM 77AK124. The audio processing circuit 77AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory according to commands and register settings from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP 77AK132.

The lamp control circuit 77AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 77AK134 decompresses and decodes the lamp drive data according to commands and register settings from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP 77AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 77AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, rotation angle (phase), etc. for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 77AK135 may generate motor control data according to commands and register settings from the CPU 77AK131 and VDP 77AK132 and output the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 77AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 77AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 10-2 shows a configuration example AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK. In the configuration example AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a small pattern display area AKA1 as a first interface display area and a variable display corresponding display area AKA2 as a second interface display area. The variable display compatible display area AKA2 includes an active display portion AKB0, a first reserved display portion AKB1, and a second reserved display portion AKB2.

In the active display portion AKB0, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display portion AKB1, pending display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending according to the number of first pending memories. In the second pending display part AKB2, a pending display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending according to the number of second pending memories. In this way, the active display portion AKB0, the first reserved display portion AKB1, and the second reserved display portion AKB2 can perform active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display section AKB1 is also called "first pending display". The pending display in the second pending display section AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The first pending display part AKB1 can display, for example, pending displays associated with the pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. The second pending display part AKB2 can display, for example, pending displays associated with the pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the second pending display is left aligned. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. In the active display part AKB0, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display part AKB1 corresponding to the start of the first special game is started, and the second special game is started. Active display corresponding to the second pending display erased (digested) in the second pending display section AKB2 corresponding to the start is started. The active display that can be displayed by the active display unit AKB0 may be any display that has the same color and pattern as the first reserved display and the second reserved display. For example, the active display is common to the first reserved display and the second reserved display. may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect. In the active display part AKB0, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

At a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern display area AKA1 is arranged. The small pattern display area AKA1 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. there is In the small pattern display area AKA1, variable display of small patterns is executed corresponding to variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size as compared with the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the decoration pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decoration pattern. Since this is an image showing a number and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. Since small patterns are displayed in a simple manner in the small pattern display area AKA1, it is sufficient to prevent the display contents and display results of the small patterns from being misunderstood by the player. In the small pattern display area AKA1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns that serve as reduced identification information is performed, and determined small patterns that are displayed results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, an effect display using a background image is performed according to background image data prepared in advance. In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative design is variably displayed or stopped. In this embodiment, control is performed to variably display or stop display a decoration pattern whose display color is red as the normal color.

FIG. 10-3 shows a configuration example of an effect control command used as a command at the time of winning a prize for the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK. In the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, based on the game ball passing through the starting area, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command specifying the occurrence of starting winning is performed. will be A start winning designation command is prepared in advance as an effect control command for designating the occurrence of starting winning. In addition, in the starting winning judgment process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command specifying the number of pending memories is performed. A reserved memory count notification command is prepared in advance as an effect control command for specifying the reserved memory count. Furthermore, in the start winning determination process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command specifying the determination result of the look-ahead determination is performed. Winning judgment result commands are prepared in advance as effect control commands for designating judgment results of prefetch judgment.

FIG. 10-3(A) shows a setting example of a starting point winning designation command, a reservation storage number notification command, and a winning determination result command. The starting point winning designation command includes a command B100H that becomes a first starting point winning designation command and a command B200H that becomes a second starting point winning designation command. Note that the suffix H indicates a hexadecimal number. The reserved storage number notification command includes a command C1XXH as a first reserved storage number notification command and a command C2XXH as a second reserved storage number notification command. In addition, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the reserved storage number notification command, different EXT data (for example, one of 00H to 04H) is set according to the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. The winning judgment result command may be a command C4XXH including a value set according to the judgment result of the prefetch judgment.

When the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting area at the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, The first starting condition is established by determining that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The first starting condition is a condition for executing a special symbol game (first special symbol game) using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first starting condition is established, the main board 11 transmits a first start winning designation command, a winning determination result command, and a first reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加When the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting area at the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs , the second starting condition is established by determining that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The second starting condition is a condition for executing a special symbol game (second special symbol game) using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second starting condition is satisfied, the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the second starting opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the second reserved storage number notification command are transmitted.

On the side of the effect control board 12, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first starting opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition can be detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. can. Establishment of the first starting condition is due to the game ball passing through the first starting area. The establishment of the second starting condition is due to the game ball passing through the second starting area. Thus, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the first start region. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the second start area. The judgment result command at the time of winning is a comparison using a game random number extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. (random number for special figure display result determination etc.) The result (winning determination result) is notified to the effect control board 12 side. The first reserved storage number notification command notifies the first reserved storage number. The second reserved memory count notification command notifies the second reserved memory count.

FIG. 10-3(B) exemplifies the content of the notification by the award determination result command. Among the winning determination result commands, command C402H, command C403H, and command C404H may be sent when the random number for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range, and the display result of the special figure game A determination result at the time of winning is notified that control is not performed in a big win game state by determining "losing". On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number for judging the special figure display result is within the jackpot judging range, and when the display result of the special figure game is determined as "big hit", it is controlled to the jackpot game state. The result of determination at the time of winning (variable display content is "jackpot") is notified. It should be noted that the command C400H notifies that the winning determination is restricted. Command C402H is sent when the random number for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach determination range at the time of loss, and the winning determination result that the variation pattern with super reach is determined at the time of loss (variable display content is Notify "super reach confirmation when losing"). On the other hand, the command C403H is sent when the random number for determining the variation pattern is within the reach decision range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning that the variation pattern with the reach effect at the time of loss is determined (variable The display content notifies you of "reach determination when losing"). Furthermore, the command C404H is sent when the random number for determining the variation pattern is neither within the range of determination of super reach nor within the determination range of reach at the time of losing, and there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach effect may not be determined. Notifies the time determination result (variable display content is "general at the time of failure"). In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random numbers extracted at the start of winning to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether or not to be determined as a specific variation pattern. is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

When the judgment result at the time of winning is "general at the time of losing", there is a case where the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode when notified. Even in this case, the reach effect of super reach is not executed, and the determination value that is compared with the random value for determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern determination table is assigned to the variation pattern so that the reach effect of normal reach is performed. All you have to do is The reach decision range compared with the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode even if the number of retained memories is a predetermined number (such as "3") or more. It is set so as to be a range in which it is determined that it will be determined. Therefore, if the random number for determining the variation pattern is neither within the super reach determination range nor within the reach determination range at the time of losing, for example, when the number of pending memories is less than a predetermined number, the decorative pattern is displayed variable at a predetermined rate may be determined as a variation pattern that is a reach mode. In this way, when the random number for determining the variation pattern is neither within the super reach determination range nor within the reach determination range at the time of losing, the variation pattern that becomes the reach mode executes the reach production of the normal reach, while the super reach It is sufficient if it is a variation pattern that does not execute the reach effect. In such a setting, the winning judgment result of "general when losing" is that the variable display of the decorative pattern is non-reach, or even if the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the reach effect of normal reach is executed. to be notified.

FIG. 10-4 shows an execution example of the step-up notice regarding the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK. A step-up notice is included in the notice performance executable by the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In the step-up notice, the effect mode of the notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, changes step by step. The effect mode that changes in the step-up notice is not limited to the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, but includes the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. or a combination of some or all of these. In this embodiment, when the step-up notice is executed, during the variable display of the decoration pattern, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect image surrounded by the display frame that is the outer frame of the rectangular shape of the predetermined display color. The display content (display mode) of is switchably displayed according to a predetermined order, and the effect operation is performed such that the effect mode changes in a plurality of stages to step up. The effect image displayed when the step-up notice is executed includes an outer-frame partial image showing the display frame and an inner-frame partial image used for switching display in step change. The in-frame partial image may be a still image that is still displayed at each step of the step change, or may be a moving image that is displayed as an animation at each step of the step change.

When the step-up notice is executed, the maximum number of steps is determined to be one of "1" to "4". The maximum number of steps indicates the number of steps in which the effect mode can be changed from the start of the step-up notice to the end. Note that the maximum number of steps is not limited to "1" to "4", and may be any number of steps based on any design. FIG. 10-4(A) shows an execution example AKC1 for displaying the effect image of the first step corresponding to the number of steps "1" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the first stage. FIG. 10-4(B) shows an execution example AKC2 for displaying a second step effect image corresponding to the step number "2" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the second stage. FIG. 10-4(C) shows an execution example AKC3 for displaying the effect image of the third step corresponding to the number of steps "3" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the third stage. FIG. 10-4(D) shows an execution example AKC4 for displaying the effect image of the fourth step corresponding to the number of steps "4" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up notice is the fourth stage.

In execution example AKC1, an outer-frame partial image with a display color of blue is displayed and a frame-inside partial image of the first step is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "1" in the first step in the step-up notice. If the maximum number of steps is "1", the step-up notice ends only with execution example AKC1. On the other hand, when the maximum number of steps is "2" or more, the display of execution example AKC1 is switched to the display of execution example AKC2. In execution example AKC2, an outer-frame partial image with a display color of green is displayed and a frame-inside partial image of the second step is displayed corresponding to the step number "2" of the second stage in the step-up notice. If the maximum number of steps is "2", the step-up notice ends after execution example AKC2. On the other hand, when the maximum number of steps is "3" or more, the display of execution example AKC2 is switched to the display of execution example AKC3. In execution example AKC3, an outer-frame partial image with a display color of red is displayed and a frame-inside partial image of the third step is displayed corresponding to the step number "3" of the third stage in the step-up notice. If the maximum number of steps is "3", the step-up notice ends after execution example AKC3. On the other hand, when the maximum number of steps is "4", the display of execution example AKC3 is switched to the display of execution example AKC4. In execution example AKC4, an outer frame partial image with a display color of gold is displayed and an inner frame partial image of the fourth step is displayed corresponding to the step number "4" of the fourth stage in the step-up notice.

When the step-up notice is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the step-up notice is not executed. Further, when step-up notice is executed, when the maximum number of steps in step-up notice is large, the degree of expectation for big win is higher than when the maximum number of steps in step-up notice is small. In this manner, the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" may differ depending on whether or not the step-up notice is executed and the mode of presentation in the step-up notice.

FIG. 10-5 shows an execution example of the story announcement regarding the feature parts 77AK-79AK. A story announcement is included in the announcement performance executable by the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In the story notice, the effect mode of the notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, continuously changes with the passage of time. In the story announcement, it is sufficient that a series of stories progresses due to such a continuous change in presentation mode. The story preview is included in the full-screen preview production. The full-screen preview effect is a preview effect that covers the entire screen by displaying a preview effect image over the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. By displaying such an effect image for notice, the display mode of the decoration pattern may be made difficult to see. The effect of displaying the effect image for notice may include a blackout effect of displaying a covering image such as a darkened image. The covering image may be an image of a predetermined color or pattern, such as an image of a luminous mode or an image of a frozen mode, or may be an image in which the display mode of the decorative pattern becomes invisible. The full-screen announcement effect may be a panel display format step-up announcement, cut-in announcement, mini-game announcement, development announcement, or the like. A notice effect that is displayed on a part of the display screen, and at least a notice effect that makes it impossible to see the decorative pattern, or a notice effect that makes it difficult to see, such as the display screen and the decorative pattern can be seen through. may be

When a story notice is executed, one of a plurality of story notice patterns is determined according to the progress of a series of stories. It suffices if the effect mode of the story notice is different according to the plurality of story notice patterns. In the execution example shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect image of execution example AKD11 is displayed first regardless of the plurality of story announcement patterns. After that, depending on the plurality of story announcement patterns, the effect image of execution example AKD21 may be displayed or the effect image of execution example AKD22 may be displayed. After the effect image of execution example AKD21 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD31 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD32 is displayed, and the effect image of execution example AKD32 is displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns. In some cases, an effect image of AKD33 is displayed. After the effect image of execution example AKD22 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD32 may be displayed or the effect image of execution example AKD33 may be displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns. After the effect image of execution example AKD31 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD41 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD42 is displayed, and the effect image of execution example AKD42 is displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns. There are cases in which the effect image of AKD43 is displayed and in which case the effect image of execution example AKD44 is displayed. After the effect image of execution example AKD32 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD42 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD43 is displayed, and the effect image of execution example AKD43 is displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns. In some cases, an effect image of AKD44 is displayed. After the effect image of execution example AKD33 is displayed, the effect image of execution example AKD43 may be displayed or the effect image of execution example AKD44 may be displayed according to a plurality of story announcement patterns.

When the story notice is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the story notice is not executed. Further, among the cases where the story notice is executed, when the performance image of execution example AKD44 is displayed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is the highest, and when the performance image of execution example AKD43 is displayed, the expectation of execution example AKD44 is the highest. The degree of expectation for big win is lower than when the performance image is displayed, and when the performance image of execution example AKD42 is displayed, the degree of expectation for big win is lower than when the performance image of execution example AKD43 is displayed, and executed. When the effect image of example AKD41 is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is lower than when the effect image of example AKD42 is displayed. In this way, it is sufficient that the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" varies depending on whether or not the story notice is executed and the effect mode in the story notice. The story announcement may be performed by playing back and displaying a moving image, or may be performed by displaying an animation of a still image.

In the command analysis process executed in step S75 of the production control main process shown in FIG. Among the empty areas in the first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control buffer setting section) of the internal memory 77AK136, the first start A prize designation command, a judgment result command at the time of prize winning, and a first reserved storage number notification command are stored in order. In addition, in the command analysis process, when the winning determination result command and the second pending storage number notification command are received together with the second start opening winning designation command, a predetermined area of the RAM77AK125 or the internal memory 77AK136 (for example, the effect control buffer setting section) Among the empty areas in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, etc., in the storage area with the smallest pending display number, which is the buffer number, the second start winning designation command and the judgment result command at the time of winning, the second reserve Store the number-of-stored notification commands in order. In the first start winning command buffer, one set of effect control commands (first start winning designation command and winning determination result command, first reserved storage number notification A storage area is secured so that commands) can be associated and stored. CPU77AK131, according to the receiving order, the production control command received when the first start winning a prize is generated, empty area in the storage area corresponding to the reserved display number "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the first start winning a prize are stored in order from the beginning. The pending display number in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning corresponds to the first pending memory number. In the second start winning command buffer, one set of effect control commands (second start winning designation command and winning determination result command, notification of the number of second pending memories) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start winning A storage area is secured so that commands) can be associated and stored. The CPU77AK131 stores the effect control commands received when the second start winning is generated, according to the order of reception, in the storage area corresponding to the reserved display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. are stored in order from the beginning. The pending display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second pending memory number.

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the pending display data storage unit AKM1. The pending display data storage unit AKM1 may be provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 77AK125 or the internal memory 77AK136 (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit). The pending display data storage unit AKM1 displays the first Various data for performing 1 suspension display and various data for performing 2nd suspension display in 2nd suspension display part AKB2 are memorize|stored as suspension display data. As the pending display data storage unit AKM1, there are a first pending display data storage unit corresponding to the pending storage display of the first special game and a second pending display data storage unit corresponding to the pending storage display of the second special game. It is sufficient if it is provided. In the pending display data storage unit AKM1, for example, storage for storing data indicating the judgment result at the time of winning and the pending display image so as to be identifiable in association with the pending number in the first pending display unit AKB1 or the second pending display unit AKB2. Space is reserved. The pending display data storage unit AKM1 uses part or all of the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer (for example, the storage area for the determination result command at the time of winning), or the first start winning command It may be configured as a storage section separate from the buffer and the second start winning command buffer.

The winning determination result that can be stored by the reserved display data indicates the determination result of the prefetch determination specified based on the winning determination result command. Winning determination results specified based on the winning determination result command include "big win", "super reach determination when losing", "reach determination when losing", and "general when losing". When the winning judgment result of "big hit" is notified by the winning judgment result command, it is specified that the display result of the variable display to be judged is "big hit". When one of the following is notified by the judgment result command at the time of winning, "Super reach when losing", "Reach when losing", or "General when losing" is notified, the display result of the variable display targeted for judgment is ” is specified. The pending display image memorizable by the pending display data is displayed on the first pending display part AKB1 and the second pending display part AKB2, thereby making it possible to recognize the presence or absence of a special game that has not yet started and the number of pending games. It is a production image.

The notice effects executable by the pachinko game machine 1 include pending display notice and active display notice. The pending display notice is, as an example of a prefetching notice effect, at least one of the first pending displays in the first pending display portion AKB1, or at least one of the second pending displays in the second pending display portion AKB2. is changed to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, the variable display corresponding to the holding display will give a ``big hit'' at a predetermined rate and control to a big win game state is announced. Due to the pending display notice, the display color of the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started is changed to a specific color (such as blue, green, red, gold, etc.) different from the predetermined color (such as white) normally used. It is only necessary to make it possible to recognize a change in the display mode of the pending display by allowing the player to make it possible to suggest that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit" at a predetermined rate. Alternatively, by changing the display pattern in the pending display to a specific pattern (such as a cherry blossom pattern) that is different from the normal predetermined pattern (such as a solid color), the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be possible to suggest something higher than . Alternatively, by setting a display mode showing a predetermined message (for example, "chance", "heat", "heat", etc.) as a pending display, the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" is increased. It may also be possible to suggest that the A change in the pending display in the pending display advance notice is also referred to as a “suspended display change”.

The active display notice changes the active display in the active display part AKB0 to a display mode different from the normal display mode, so that a "big hit" occurs at a predetermined rate in the variable display that is being executed after the start condition is satisfied, resulting in a big win. It announces that it will be controlled to a game state. When changing the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed by the active display notice, the display color, display pattern, presence or absence and content of the message, etc. can be It is sufficient if it can be changed to something different from. A change in the active display in the active display announcement is also called an "active display change". Note that the display mode of the active display that can be changed by the active display notice may include a unique display mode that is different from the display mode of the pending display that can be changed by the pending display notice. The display mode of the pending display changeable by the pending display notice may include a unique display mode different from the display mode of the active display changeable by the active display notice.

FIGS. 10-6 (B1) to (B5) show a plurality of effect images that can be used for pending display and active display. In this embodiment, five display images AKE0 to AKE4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for pending display and active display. The number of display images that can be used for pending display and active display is not limited to five, and may be any number of images based on any design. The display image AKE0 is an effect image for a round plain white display. The display image AKE1 is an effect image in the case of performing a circular plain blue display. The display image AKE2 is an effect image in the case of performing a circular plain green display. The display image AKE3 is an effect image in the case of performing a round plain red display. The display image AKE4 is an effect image in the case of performing a round plain gold display. The normal display mode in the pending display and the active display is a round plain white display. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is gold, the degree of expectation for a big win is the highest. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is red, the expectation of a big hit is lower than when the display color is gold. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is green, the expectation of a big hit is lower than when the display color is red. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is blue, the expectation of a big hit is lower than when the display color is green. The display color of the pending display and the active display is normally white, and in this case the expectation of a big win is the lowest.

In the characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK, it is possible to execute a color change effect at a predetermined rate based on the game ball passing through the starting area provided in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. The color change performance is a special performance for changing a plurality of performance displays displayed during the period from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the starting area to the color change end timing to a common color. The color change end timing may be, for example, the timing at which the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state in the variable display to change the target. In this embodiment, the color change rendering is executed in the case of executing a monochrome change in which a plurality of rendering displays are changed to a grayscale display color, and in the case of executing a gold-based transformation in which a plurality of rendering displays are changed into a gold-based display color. Including if and. Whether or not to execute a color change performance and whether to execute a monochrome change or a golden change can be determined at different ratios according to the winning determination result indicated by the winning determination result command. In addition, in the color change effect, when the normal color of multiple effect displays is changed to a grayscale display color, and when the normal color of multiple effect displays is changed to a gold-based display color , and a multi-gradation monochromatic image expressed in monochromatic colors with different lightnesses are displayed. However, in the following embodiments, the case where a plurality of effect displays are changed to a grayscale display color is referred to as a monochrome change, and the case where a plurality of effect displays are changed to a gold-based display color is referred to as a gold-based change. , each color change effect will be described separately.

In the characteristic parts 77AK to 79AK, a battle zone effect can be executed as a specific effect different from the special effect. The battle zone effect suggests control to a big win game state by displaying a prepared effect image different from the normal time based on the result of winning judgment corresponding to the pending display. The battle zone effect is, for example, a specific effect whose execution is started corresponding to the start of the variable display and which is in a mode of effect corresponding to the battle zone during the period until the end timing of the battle zone. The timing at which the battle zone ends may be the timing corresponding to the derivation display of the display result in the variable display that becomes the target variation. Whether or not to execute the battle zone effect can be determined at different ratios according to the winning judgment result stored in the reserved display data storage unit AKM1.

FIG. 10-7(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In this pre-reading notice setting process, it is determined whether or not a start-up winning command has been received (step AKS001). The start-up winning command includes a start-up winning designation command, a pending memory count notification command, and a winning determination result command. In step AKS001, for example, it is confirmed whether or not a start entry winning designation command, a winning determination result command, and a pending memory number notification command are newly stored in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning or the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not the command is received at the time of starting winning. At this time, if no command is received (step AKS001; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is command reception (step AKS001; Yes), the content of notification by the received command is specified (step AKS002). For example, the determination result at the time of winning is specified as the content of notification by the determination result command at the time of winning. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a color change limit (step 77AKS01). At step 77AKS01, it is determined that there is a color change limitation when a predetermined limitation condition for color change presentation is satisfied. The limiting condition for the color change effect is met, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed. In addition, the condition for restricting the color change effect may be established when the content of the notification by the winning determination result command is during the winning determination restriction. The condition for restricting the color change effect is that the winning judgment result stored in the pending display data storage unit AKM1 includes a winning judgment result different from "general at loss" before the current winning judgment result. may hold if The condition for restricting the color change effect is satisfied when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "jackpot" or when the ready-to-reach effect of super reach is executed in response to the variable display being executed. may The limiting condition for the color change effect may be established when the execution of the color change effect has already started.

If there is no color change limitation (step 77AKS01; No), a color change effect is determined (step 77AKS02). The decision of the color change effect includes the decision of whether or not to execute the color change effect, and the decision of whether to execute the monochrome change or the golden change when the color change effect is executed. Just do it. At step 77AKS02, execution of the color change effect can be determined when the command for start winning is received, so the color change effect can be executed from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the start area. At this time, one of "no change" that does not execute the color change effect, "monochrome change" that executes the monochrome change in the color change effect, and "golden change" that executes the golden change in the color change effect is determined by Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of step 77AKS02 is "no change" (step 77AKS03).

When the decision result of the color change effect is "monochrome change" or "golden color change" and not "no change" (step 77AKS03; No), the fixed decorative pattern which becomes the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns. is being derived and displayed (step 77AKS04). When the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed (step 77AKS04; Yes), standby setting for color change effect is performed (step 77AKS05). At step 77AKS05, for example, a color change standby flag may be set to ON. The color change standby flag may be provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting section, etc.) of the RAM 77AK125 or the built-in memory 77AK136.

When the final stop symbol is not being derived and displayed (step 77AKS04; No), control is performed to start execution of the color change effect (step 77AKS06). In step 77AKS06, control processing is performed when the execution of the color change effect is started by the drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. When the color change effect is executed, the effect image in the effect display is generated using the same image data as in the normal case where the color is not changed. On the other hand, when the color change effect is executed, the color in the effect display is changed by performing drawing processing different from the case where the normal color is not changed. The drawing process including the execution of the color change effect is executed by the VDP77AK132 based on the drawing command from the CPU77AK131. When the execution of the color change effect is started, an effect image notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed in a predetermined color change start notification period. The control of step 77AKS06 may include control for displaying on the screen of the image display device 5 an effect image notifying the start of the color change effect by the drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. The effect image notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed with priority over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect, such as the effect image displayed in the step-up notice, for example. Thus, it is sufficient that the start notification effect for notifying the start of the color change effect can be executed with priority over the predetermined advance notice effect.

Following step 77AKS06, voice output continuation control is performed (step 77AKS07). At step 77AKS07, when the color change effect is executed, a control process is performed to continue the effect with the same sound as before the execution. When the execution of the color change effect is started, a sound notifying the start of the color change effect may be output during a predetermined color change start sound output period. In this case, after the end of the color change start sound output period, control may be performed so that the same sound effect as before the color change effect is resumed. Even in this way, it is possible to execute a common sound presentation before and after the color change start sound output period. The sound effect using the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R by the control of step 77 AKS07 is not affected even when the color change effect is executed, and is common to the case where the color change effect is not executed. can be executed in the mode of production. In this way, during the period from the start of execution of the color change effect to the end of the execution of the color change effect after the end of the color change start voice output period, the effect is common to the period in which the color change effect is not executed. It suffices if the voice effect can be executed in any manner.

If there is a color change limitation in step 77AKS01 (step 77AKS01; Yes), or if "no change" in step 77AKS03 (step 77AKS03; Yes), after setting step 77AKS05 and controlling step 77AKS07, After performing the update setting of the pending display at the time of starting winning (step AKS003), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When the number of first reserved memories increases by 1 due to the passage of the game ball through the first start winning hole, the first reserved display is displayed by adding a new first reserved display in the first reserved display part AKB1. It should be incremented by 1. When the number of second reserved memories increases by 1 due to the passage of the game ball through the second start winning hole, the second reserved display is displayed by adding a new second reserved display in the second reserved display part AKB2. It should be incremented by 1. The display mode of the first pending display and the second pending display may be determined to any one of the display images AKE0 to AKE4 to be the pending display image at a predetermined ratio according to the result of determination at the time of winning. At the beginning of the empty area in the pending display data storage unit AKM1, the winning determination result specified from the winning determination result command and the pending display data indicating the pending display image determined in step AKS003 are stored. Let it be.

FIG. 10-7(B) shows a determination example AKG01 of the color change effect. At step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the presence or absence of the color change effect is determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the result of determination at the time of winning. For example, numerical data representing random numbers for color change effect determination are extracted, and a prepared color change effect determination table stored in advance in the ROM 77AK124 or the like is referred to. Thus, it is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of the color change performance, i.e., whether or not to execute the color change performance, and whether to execute the monochrome change or the golden color change when executing the color change performance. In the determination example AKG01 of the color change effect, "no change" that does not execute the color change effect, or "monochrome change" that executes the monochrome change and "golden change" that executes the golden change among the cases where the color change effect is executed. ” is determined. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "super reach confirmation when losing", the decision rate of "no change" is 80%, the decision rate of "monochrome change" is 20%, and the decision rate of "golden change" is 80%. The determination rate is 0%. In addition, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the decision rate of "no change" is 40%, the decision rate of "monochrome change" is 58%, and the decision rate of "golden color change" is 2%. If the result of determination at the time of winning is other than the above, the determination rate of "no change" is 100%, and it is always decided not to execute the color change effect. By such setting, when the color change performance is executed, the display result of the variable display becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when the color change performance is not executed. Also, when the color change effect is executed, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is higher than when the color change effect is not executed. The display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and the ratio of control to the big win game state differs between when the monochrome change is executed and when the golden color change is executed as the color change effect. When a golden color change is executed as the color change effect, it is determined that the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and the game state is controlled to the big win game state. By the color change effect, it is possible to suggest that the game is controlled to a big hit game state at a predetermined rate. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the color change effect and improve the game interest.

In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when it is determined in step 77AKS01 that there is a color change restriction, step 77AKS02 is not executed, so it is not decided to execute the color change effect. Since the limiting condition of the color change effect is satisfied within the range that the battle zone effect is being executed, there is a limit that the color change effect is not executed in this range. This restricts the execution of the color change effect after the start of the battle zone effect. In step 77AKS01, when the execution of the color change effect has already started, regardless of whether the color change effect is a monochrome change or a golden color change, it may be determined that the color change is restricted. , it may be determined that there is a color restriction only when the color change effect is a golden color change. When the gold color change in the color change effect has already been executed, it is determined that the color change is restricted, and the new color change effect is restricted so as not to be executed, thereby stopping the color change effect of the gold color change. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity due to the problem, and to appropriately improve the amusement of the game. The golden color change in the color change effect is a color change effect with a high expectation of a big hit, such as the fact that it is determined to be controlled to the big win game state, so by restricting the execution of the new color change effect, It is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big win game state from being spoiled. If the monochrome change in the color change effect has already been executed, the decision is made in step 77AKS02, and the color change effect is changed from the monochrome change to the golden change based on the determination of "golden change" to execute the golden change. Control to change to may be performed. On the other hand, if the determination by 77AKS02 is not "golden color change", control may be performed to continue the monochrome change in the color change effect that has already been executed. In this way, among a plurality of types of color change effects, after the execution of monochrome change with relatively low expectation of big win is started, it is possible to execute gold color change with relatively high expectation of big win. Since the player's expectation for the big winning game state is heightened step by step, the player's attention to the execution contents of the color change presentation is heightened, and the amusement of the game can be appropriately improved.

In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when it is determined in step 77AKS04 that the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed, step 77AKS06 is not executed, so execution of the color change effect is not started. There is a limitation that the color change effect is not executed while the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed. Incidentally, when it is determined in step 77AKS04 that the final stop symbol is being derived and displayed, the execution of the color change effect can be started in response to the start of the next variable display.

FIG. 10-8 shows an effect execution example when the color change effect is not executed. In the effect execution example 77AKH01 shown in FIG. 10-8(A), the variable display of the decorative design is executed, and the decorative design is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. A performance image corresponding to the step number "1" of the step-up notice is displayed while all the symbols are fluctuating. In the effect execution example 77AKH01, a sound effect is also executed in which the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-8(B), the game ball passes through the first starting area at the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this starting winning, it is determined at step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process that the color change effect is not executed "no change".

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS02, in the effect execution example 77AKH02 shown in FIG. 10-8(C), each of the multiple effect displays continues or progresses while the colors in the multiple effect displays remain normal. For example, an effect image corresponding to the step number "2" of the step-up notice is displayed. This effect image includes an outer frame partial image whose display color is green. Also, the background image is displayed in normal colors. In the variable display of decorative patterns, a decorative pattern with a display color of red is displayed as the normal color. Even in the small pattern display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display corresponding display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area, the effect display corresponding to the small pattern, suspension display, and active display is performed in normal colors. In the effect execution example 77AKH02, a sound effect is also executed in which the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After that, in the effect execution example 77AKH03 shown in FIG. 10-8(D), the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decoration symbols is completed. Corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variable display of the small symbols also ends, and the determined small symbols are derived and displayed in the small symbol display area AKA1. The background image is displayed in normal colors as in the production execution examples 77AKH01 and 77AKH02. The decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed is displayed in red as the normal color. Also in the display area AKA2 for variable display, effect display corresponding to the suspension display and the active display is performed in the normal color. In effect execution example 77AKH03, a sound effect of outputting the sound of music phrase PH03 from speakers 8L and 8R is also executed.

FIG. 10-9 shows an effect execution example when monochrome change is executed among color change effects. In effect execution example 77AKH11 shown in FIG. 10-9(A), similarly to effect execution example 77AKH01, variable display of decoration patterns, step-up notice, and background image display are executed, and effect displays corresponding to each are performed. ing. Also, from the speakers 8L and 8R, a sound effect is executed in which the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output in the same manner as in the effect execution example 77AKH01. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-9(B), the game ball passes through the first starting area at the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this starting winning, at step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process, "monochrome change" is determined to execute monochrome change among the color change effects.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS02, in effect execution example 77AKH12 shown in FIG. 10-9(C), the colors in the plurality of effect displays are changed to a common grayscale display color. A grayscale display color has a common color attribute in that it is an achromatic color with a saturation of 0% in, for example, an HSL (Hue Saturation Lightness) color space or an HSV (Hue Saturation Value) color space. . Note that the method of specifying the color attribute is not limited to the HSL color space or the HSV color space. Any color system, such as the *b* color system, may be used. In any color space or color system, a plurality of effect displays may be changed to a common color by monochrome change. For example, the background image is displayed in a grayscale display color different from the normal color. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed in a grayscale display color different from the normal color. In the case of monochrome change, the small pattern display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display support display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area may be maintained without changing the normal color. In this case, the display mode of the small symbols, the suspended display, and the active display may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode, for example, by changing the shape corresponding to the monochrome change.

In step 77AKS06 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect, such as the effect image displayed in the step-up notice, is preferentially displayed over the effect display in the predetermined notice effect. , the effect control accompanying the start of the color change effect may be performed. In effect execution example 77AKH12, even if step-up notice is executed in the same way as effect execution example 77AKH02, the effect image announcing the message "Monochrome time start!!" is displayed in priority over this step-up notice. The effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed in a grayscale display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the grayscale display color. The effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . With such a display, when the color change effect is started, the scene in which the display color is changed can be concealed, thereby suppressing the sense of incompatibility caused by the change in the display color. When an effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect may be interrupted by stopping the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. After the execution of the predetermined advance notice effect is interrupted in this way, when the display of the effect image for informing the start of the color change effect is erased, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is continued from the point of suspension, Execution of the predetermined advance notice effect may be restarted. Alternatively, the execution of the interrupted predetermined notice effect may be ended as it is. Further, when an effect image for informing the start of the color change effect is displayed, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is advanced by advancing the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect on the back side (back side) of this display. The display of the effect image for informing the start of the color change effect may be given priority over the display. In this way, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect progressing on the far side may be entirely invisible or partly visible by displaying the effect image notifying the start of the color change effect. may When a performance image notifying the start of the color change performance is displayed, the performance display in the predetermined advance notice performance is reduced compared to when the performance image is not displayed, and the performance display in the predetermined notice performance is reduced. , priority may be given to the display of an effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect. When an effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is advanced with a higher transparency than when this effect image is not displayed, so that the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect is more transparent than the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. , priority may be given to the display of an effect image that notifies the start of the color change effect. In addition, when an effect image notifying the start of the color change effect is displayed, arbitrary display control is performed to lower the visibility of the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect than when the effect image is not displayed. The display of the effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be prioritized over the effect display in the predetermined advance notice effect. The predetermined notice effect may be a notice effect with a lower degree of expectation for a big hit than the color change effect. In step 77AKS01 of the pre-reading notice setting process, when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "jackpot" or when the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed, the limiting condition of the color change effect is established. Then, the predetermined notice effect that is being executed when the execution of the color change effect is started should be a notice effect with a low degree of expectation for a big hit. When a performance image for informing the start of the color change performance is displayed, the performance image for informing the start of the color change performance is prioritized over the performance display in the predetermined advance notice performance with a lower expectation for the big win than the color change performance. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation for the big win game state and improve the game interest.

At step 77AKS07 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process, control is performed to continue the voice output. As a result, in effect execution example 77AKH12, as in effect execution example 77AKH02, a sound effect of outputting the sound of music phrase PH02 from speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Therefore, the voice effect can be executed in a common voice output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without executing the color change effect or the color is changed after the color change effect is executed.

After that, in the effect execution example 77AKH13 shown in FIG. 10-9(D), the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decoration symbols ends. Corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variable display of the small symbols also ends, and the determined small symbols are derived and displayed in the small symbol display area AKA1. The background image is displayed in a grayscale display color following the effect execution example 77AKH12. The decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are also displayed in a grayscale display color following the effect execution example 77AKH12. In the small pattern display area AKA1 and the variable display corresponding display area AKA2, effect display corresponding to small patterns, suspension display and active display is performed in normal colors. In effect execution example 77AKH13, as in effect execution example 77AKH03, a sound effect of outputting the sound of music phrase PH03 from speakers 8L and 8R is executed. In this case also, the voice effect is executed in a common voice output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without executing the color change effect or the color is changed after the color change effect is executed. can be done.

FIG. 10-10 shows an effect execution example when a golden color change is executed among the color change effects. In effect execution example 77AKH21 shown in FIG. 10-10(A), similarly to effect execution example 77AKH01, variable display of decoration patterns, step-up notice, and background image display are executed, and effect displays corresponding to each are performed. ing. Also, from the speakers 8L and 8R, a sound effect is executed in which the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output in the same manner as in the effect execution example 77AKH01. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-10(B), the game ball passes through the first starting area at the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this starting prize, in step 77AKS02 of the pre-reading notice setting process, "golden color change" is determined to execute a gold color change among the color change effects.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS02, in effect execution example 77AKH22 shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the colors of the plurality of effect displays are changed to a common golden display color. Gold display colors have a common color attribute in that the hue is within the range of 51°±5% in 360° notation, for example, in the HSL color space and the HSV color space. It should be noted that the method of specifying the attribute of color may be the same as in the case of monochrome change. Further, the common color attribute may have a single hue value (for example, only 51°), or may have a wider hue within a predetermined range. It is only necessary for the player to recognize the commonality with the case where the hue change effect is not executed in each effect display by making the saturation and lightness different within the range where the hue is common. For example, the background image has a golden display color that is different from the normal color, and the difference in saturation and lightness in each pixel means that the same background image is displayed as when the color change effect is not executed. , become recognizable to the player. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display color is gold, which is different from the normal color, and the common decorative pattern is displayed when the color change effect is not executed due to the difference in the saturation and brightness of each pixel. becomes recognizable by the player. In the case of a gold color change, the display color of the small pattern display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the display area AKA2 which corresponds to the variable display which is the second interface display area are changed to a gold color different from the normal color. It should change. In step 77 AKS02, only when the result of judgment at the time of winning is "big hit", it is possible to decide to "golden type change", so when the gold type change is executed, it can be controlled to the big win game state. Determine. Therefore, even if the small symbols, pending display, and active display are changed to a golden display color different from the normal color, the display result of the variable display is finally "big win" and is controlled to the big win game state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress discomfort caused by a change in display color. In the case of the golden color change, the display mode of the small symbols, the suspended display, and the active display may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode, for example, by changing the shape corresponding to the gold color change.

In step 77AKS06 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect, such as the effect image displayed in the step-up notice, is preferentially displayed over the effect display in the predetermined notice effect. , the effect control accompanying the start of the color change effect may be performed. In effect execution example 77AKH22, even when step-up notice is executed in the same way as effect execution example 77AKH02, an effect image announcing the message "Gold time starts!!" is displayed in priority over this step-up notice. The effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed in a golden display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the gold display color. The effect image for notifying the start of the color change effect may be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . With such a display, when the color change effect is started, the scene in which the display color is changed can be concealed, thereby suppressing the sense of incompatibility caused by the change in the display color.

At step 77AK07 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process, control is performed to continue the voice output. As a result, in effect execution example 77AKH22, as in effect execution example 77AKH02, an audio effect of outputting the sound of music phrase PH02 from speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Therefore, the voice effect can be executed in a common voice output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without executing the color change effect or the color is changed after the color change effect is executed.

After that, in the effect execution example 77AKH23 shown in FIG. 10-10(D), the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display of the decoration symbols is completed. Corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variable display of the small symbols also ends, and the determined small symbols are derived and displayed in the small symbol display area AKA1. The background image is displayed in a golden display color following effect execution example 77AKH22. The decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are also displayed in a golden display color following the effect execution example 77AKH22. In the small symbol display area AKA1 and the display area AKA2 corresponding to the variable display, following the effect execution example 77AKH22, the effect display corresponding to the small symbol, the suspended display and the active display is performed in the golden display color. In effect execution example 77AKH23, as in effect execution example 77AKH03, an audio effect for outputting the sound of music phrase PH03 from speakers 8L and 8R is executed. In this case also, the voice effect is executed in a common voice output mode regardless of whether the color is the normal color without executing the color change effect or the color is changed after the color change effect is executed. can be done.

FIG. 10-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In this variable display start setting process, the final stop design, etc., which will be a fixed decorative design as a variable display result of the decorative design, is determined (step AKS011). If the CPU 77AK 131 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, good. When the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are set to send the command at the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the performance control board 12 . The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state ends becomes a time saving state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable probability state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", different (mismatched) decoration symbols in the "left" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5R are determined as final stop symbols. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the same (matching) decorative design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R is determined as the final stop design. In this case, among the confirmed decorative patterns, the middle confirmed decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined as a decorative pattern different from the left and right confirmed decorative patterns. be done. If the variable display content is "non-variable (big hit)" or "variable (big hit)", the same ( match) is determined to be the final stop symbol. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the game is in the state of the big win or in the state of the big win game. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it may be determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. . In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, so that the control to the variable probability state is made difficult, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be notified in a recognizable manner that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are varied again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is decided to execute the re-lottery performance, the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery performance.

After determining the final stop pattern and the like in step AKS011, it is determined whether or not there is a standby setting for color change effect (step 77AKS41). In step 77AKS41, for example, when the color change standby flag is ON, it may be determined that there is a standby setting for color change effect. If there is a standby setting for the color change effect (step 77AKS41; Yes), a setting for starting execution of the color change effect is made (step 77AKS42). In step 77AKS42, by the control processing similar to step 77AKS06 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. It would be nice if it could be done. The standby setting of the color change effect is a step of the pre-reading notice setting process if it is a period in which the final stop pattern is derived and displayed when it is decided to execute the color change effect based on the occurrence of the start winning. 77AKS05. In this case, the setting for starting the execution of the color change effect is made in step 77AKS42, so that the execution of the color change effect can be started when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. In this way, during the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, such as during the derivation display of the final stop pattern in the variable display of the decorative patterns, the color changes based on the game ball passing through the starting area. When the execution of the effect is determined, the execution of the color change effect is started after the stop display period ends.

Further, in step 77AKS42, by the same control processing as in step 77AKS07 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. The production may be made continuously executable. Therefore, the sound effect using the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not affected even when the color change effect is executed, and is executed in the same effect mode as when the color change effect is not executed. It becomes possible. During the period from the start of the execution of the color change effect to the end of the color change start sound output period after the end of the color change start sound output period, in the same effect mode as the period in which the color change effect is not executed. It is sufficient if the voice production can be executed.

When there is no standby setting for color change effect (step 77AKS41; No), after setting in step 77AKS42, battle zone effect determination processing (step AKS012) and notice effect determination processing (step AKS013) are executed in order. Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step AKS014). For example, the CPU77AK131 selects one of the plurality of prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and sets it as a usage pattern. In addition, the CPU 77AK131 selects one of prepared effect control patterns (battle zone effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution setting of the battle zone effect by the battle zone effect determination process of step AKS012, and sets it as a use pattern. You may One of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (previous effect control pattern) may be selected and set as a use pattern in correspondence with the execution setting of the previous effect by the previous notice effect determination process of step AKS013. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, the battle zone production control pattern, and the advance notice production control pattern, and one production control corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production A pattern may be set.

When the production control pattern is determined by step AKS014, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the production control provided in the predetermined area of the RAM77AK125 or the built-in memory 77AK136 (production control timer setting unit, etc.) The initial value of the process timer is set (step AKS015). Then, a setting is made to start changing the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS016). At this time, for example, by supplying the display control data specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special figure fluctuation effect control pattern) determined by step AKS014 to the VDP77AK132, the image display device The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of 5.

After setting the start of variation in step AKS016, in response to the start of the variable display, such as the first suspension display in the first suspension display portion AKB1 and the second suspension display in the second suspension display portion AKB2 etc. are set (step AKS017). For example, when the first special game is executed (started), in the first reservation display part AKB1, the display part (rightmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). , moves (shifts) the first pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" one by one in the right direction. On the other hand, when the second special game is executed (started), in the second reservation display part AKB2, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). , moves (shifts) the second pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" one by one in the left direction. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In accordance with the shifting of the pending display, the storage contents of the pending display data storage unit may also be shifted. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS018), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-12(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS012 of the variable display start setting process as the battle zone effect determination process. In the battle zone effect determination process, "1" is set as the initial value of the suspension number in order to confirm the contents stored in the suspension display data storage unit AKM1 (step 77AKS11). Subsequently, the determination result corresponding to the set reservation number is read (step 77AKS12). In step 77AKS12, data indicating the result of determination at the time of winning, which is stored corresponding to the set reservation number in the reservation display data storage unit AKM1, for example, may be read. At this time, it is determined whether or not there is no determination result that there is no storage of the determination result corresponding to the reservation number (step 77AKS13). If no hold display data corresponding to the set hold number is stored, step 77 AKS13 determines that there is no judgment result. If there is no determination result (step 77AKS13; Yes), the battle zone effect determination process is terminated.

If there is a winning determination result stored in step 77AKS13 (step 77AKS13; No), it is determined whether or not the read winning determination result is "general when losing" (step 77AKS14). At this time, if it is "general when losing" (step 77AKS14; Yes), 1 is added to the set reservation number (step 77AKS15), and the process returns to step 77AKS12. As described above, in the battle zone effect processing, after the initial value "1" of the reservation number is set in step 77AKS11, the reservation display data storage unit AKM1 determines that the judgment result at the time of winning is different from "general at the time of loss". The processing from step 77AKS12 to step 77AKS15 is repeated until the data is reached or until the reservation number reaches a value greater than the first reservation storage number or the second reservation storage number.

In step 77AKS14, if the winning determination result is not "general when losing" (step 77AKS14; No), it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is "super reach determination when losing" or "big hit". (step 77AKS16). At this time, if the result of determination at the time of winning is neither "super reach when losing" nor "big hit" (step 77AKS16; No), the battle zone effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of determination at the time of winning is ``confirmation of super reach when losing'' or ``jackpot'' (step 77AKS16; Yes), the presence or absence of the battle zone presentation, that is, whether or not to execute the battle zone presentation is determined. (Step 77AKS17). At step 77 AKS17, one of "no effect" in which the battle zone effect is not executed and "with effect" in which the battle zone effect is executed is determined.

Based on the result of determination in step 77AKS17, it is determined whether or not it is determined "no effect" that does not execute the battle zone effect (step 77AKS18). If it is "no effect" (step 77AKS18; Yes), the battle zone effect determination process is terminated. If it is "with effect" instead of "no effect" (step 77AKS18; No), the setting for starting the battle zone effect is performed (step 77AKS19), and then the battle zone effect determination process is terminated. In step 77 AKS19, the first pending display of the first pending display portion AKB1 or the second pending display of the second pending display portion AKB2 corresponds to the shift timing when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Then, the setting for starting execution of the battle zone effect is performed. The battle zone effect may include, for example, a telop notification effect that notifies the player that the battle zone effect is different from the color change effect by displaying a telop so that the player can recognize it. The telop notification effect may be executable only during the period in which the battle zone effect is executed in parallel with the color change effect, and regardless of whether it is executed in parallel with the color change effect, the battle zone It may be executable during the period during which the effect is executed.

FIG. 10-12(B) shows a determination example AKG02 of the battle zone effect. At step 77AKS17 of the battle zone effect determination process, the presence or absence of the battle zone effect is determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the winning judgment result read at step 77AKS12. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for battle zone effect determination is extracted, and a prepared battle zone effect determination table stored in advance in the ROM 77AK 124 or the like is referred to. As a result, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not the battle zone effect is to be executed. In the determination example AKG02 of the battle zone effect, it is determined to be either “no effect” in which the battle zone effect is not executed or “executed” in which the battle zone effect is executed. For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is "definite super reach when losing", the determination rate of "without effect" is 80%, and the determination rate of "with effect" is 20%. When the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the determination rate of "no effect" is 40%, and the determination rate of "with effect" is 60%. By such setting, when the battle zone performance is executed, the display result of the variable display becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when the battle zone performance is not executed. In addition, when the battle zone effect is executed, the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win is higher than when the battle zone effect is not executed. By the battle zone production, it is possible to suggest that the game state is controlled to a big hit game state at a predetermined rate. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be heightened by the battle zone production, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the battle zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-12(A), the presence or absence of the battle zone effect can be determined in step 77AKS17 regardless of whether or not the color change effect is being executed. Therefore, the battle zone effect can be executed after the execution of the color change effect is started. Also, if it is not "general when losing" at step 77AKS14 of the battle zone effect determination process, the processes after step 77AKS16 are executed to end the battle zone effect determination process. As a result, in the winning determination results stored in the pending display data storage unit AKM1, in the range in which the winning determination result different from the "general at loss" is included before the winning determination result to be read out , Step 77 AKS16 and subsequent steps are not executed, so there is a limit that the battle zone effect is not executed. On the other hand, the condition for restricting the color change effect can be established when a winning judgment result different from "general winning" is included before the current winning judgment result. Therefore, the battle zone effect can be executed with the variable display common to the color change effect as a suggestion target.

FIG. 10-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS013 of the variable display start setting process as the advance notice effect determination process. In the advance notice effect determination process, as the decision of the advance notice during all pattern fluctuations, presence or absence of advance notice during all pattern fluctuations as to whether or not to execute advance notice during all pattern fluctuations, advance notice type in the case of executing advance notice during all pattern fluctuations, is determined (step 77AKS31). The advance notice during all design fluctuations is a notice effect that can be executed during all design fluctuations in which the decoration designs are changed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. A character display notice corresponding to the notice type of "character notice", a step-up notice corresponding to the notice type of "step-up notice", and a story notice corresponding to the notice type of "story notice" may be included. The character display advance notice is effect display such that a effect image showing a specific character is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 . The advance notice of character display includes character type, display number, size, color, pattern, display position, display timing, display period, passage speed, other actions, dialogue, or a combination of all or part of these characters. It may be executed so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is different according to an arbitrary effect mode by displaying the effect image showing . The step-up notice may be a notice effect such as the execution example shown in FIG. 10-4. The story notice may be a notice effect such as the execution example shown in FIG. 10-5. At step 77, AKS31, it is determined to be "no notice" in which the notice during all symbol changes is not executed, or "character notice", "step-up notice", or "story notice" in the case of executing the notice effect. The CPU 77 AK 131 extracts a random number value for determining the advance notice during all-symbol fluctuations, and based on the random value, refers to the advance notice determination table during all-symbol fluctuations according to the variable display content, thereby determining the presence or absence of the notice effect and the notice type. should be determined.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS31, it is determined whether or not "no notice" is determined (step 77AKS32). If any notice type is determined instead of "no notice" (step 77AKS32; No), the notice performance pattern during all symbol changes is determined (step 77AKS33). The all-symbol-fluctuation notice effect pattern is a effect pattern that can specify the execution timing and effect mode of the all-symbol-change notice, and if a plurality of patterns are stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 77 AK 124, etc. good. The CPU 77 AK 131 selects an all-symbol-fluctuation notice effect pattern determination table corresponding to the notice type, extracts a random number value for determining the all-symbol change notice effect pattern, and based on the random value, performs variable display contents. Then, by referring to the selected all-symbols-fluctuation notice performance pattern determination table, the all-symbols-fluctuation notice performance pattern can be determined.

If it is "no notice" at step 77AKS32 (step 77AKS32; Yes), or after determination at step 77AKS33, it is determined whether or not the variable display content is "non-reach" (step 77AKS34). If the variable display content is "non-reach" (step 77AKS34; Yes), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. If the variable display content is other than "non-reach" (step 77AKS34; No), it is determined whether or not the color change effect is being executed (step 77AKS35). If the color change effect is being executed (step 77AKS35; Yes), it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the target change of the color change effect (step 77AKS36). The target variation of the color change effect is a variable display determined to execute the color change effect based on the winning judgment result, and is a target variable that suggests that the color change effect is controlled to a big win game state. display.

If it is not the target change of the color change effect (step 77AKS36; No), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. If the color change effect is not being executed at step 77AKS35 (step 77AKS35; No), or if there is a target change for the color change effect at step 77AKS36 (step 77AKS36; Yes), the notice is executed after the ready-to-win is established. Whether or not there is a notice after establishment of the reach, and the type of notice in the case of executing the notice after establishment of the reach are determined (step 77AKS37). The advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state is an advance notice effect that can be executed after establishment of the ready-to-win state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. A group display notice corresponding to the notice type of "notice" and a movable body action notice corresponding to the notice type of "movable body action notice" may be included. In the message display color advance notice, an effect display is performed in which the display color of the character image that notifies of the message in which reach establishment is recognizable is changed. The message display color advance notice may be executed so that the degree of expectation for a big win differs according to the display color of the character image. In the group display advance notice, an effect display is performed such that a group of effect images showing a large number of identical or similar characters pass over the screen of the image display device 5 . Group display notice includes character type, display number, size, color, pattern, display position, display timing, display period, passage speed, or a combination of some or all of these, and other effect image groups showing characters. It may be executed so that the reliability of the big hit is different according to an arbitrary effect mode by the display of . As for the advance notice of the motion of the movable body, an effect including the motion of the movable body 32 is executed. The advance notice of the movable body 32 is based on the movement distance, movement speed, number of movements, direction of movement, number of objects to be moved, or a combination of some or all of these, and other arbitrary effects by the movement of the movable body 32. Therefore, it may be executed so that the reliability of the jackpot is different. At step 77, AKS37, it is determined to be "no notice", which does not execute the notice after establishment of reach, or "display color notice", "group display notice", or "movable body movement notice" when the notice effect is executed. The CPU 77AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state, and determines the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the type of notice by referring to the notice determination table after establishment of the ready-to-win state according to the variable display result based on the random value. do it.

Based on the determination result of step 77AKS37, it is determined whether or not "no notice" is determined (step 77AKS38). If it is "no notice" (step 77AKS38; Yes), the notice effect determination process is terminated. If any notice type is determined instead of "no notice" (step 77AKS38; No), the notice effect pattern after establishment of reach is determined (step 77AKS39), and then the notice effect determination processing is terminated. The post-ready-to-win announcement effect pattern is an effect pattern that can specify the execution timing of the ready-to-win announcement, effect mode, and the like, and it is sufficient that a plurality of patterns are stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 77AK124. The CPU 77 AK 131 selects a post-ready notice effect pattern determination table corresponding to the notice type, extracts a random number for determining the post-reach notice effect pattern, and based on the random value, according to the variable display result, etc. By referring to the selected ready-to-win announcement effect pattern determination table, the post-ready-to-win announcement effect pattern may be determined.

FIG. 10-14(A) shows a determination example AKG11 of advance notice during all symbol changes. At step 77AKS31 of the notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of the notice during all symbol changes and the notice type are determined at a rate corresponding to the contents of the variable display. At this time, when the advance notice during all symbol variations is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher than when it is not executed. Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the step-up notice is executed than when the character display notice is executed. The degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the story notice is executed than when the step-up notice is executed.

FIG. 10-14(B) shows a determination example AKG12 of advance notice after reach is established. In step 77AKS37 of the notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of the notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state and the type of notice are determined at a rate corresponding to the result of the variable display. At this time, when the advance notice is executed after the ready-to-win is established, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when it is not executed. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the group display notice is executed than when the message display color notice is executed. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the movable body motion notice is executed than when the group display notice is executed.

In the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, step 77AKS37 is executed when it is determined in step 77AKS35 that the color change effect is being executed and in step 77AKS36 it is determined that the target is not changed. Since it is not executed, it is not decided to execute the notice after reach establishment. There is a limit that the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state is not executed in the range until the target changes while the color change effect is being executed. As a result, the execution of the post-reach notice is restricted during the period until the target changes after the execution of the color change effect is started. In the variable display in which the determination result at the time of winning is "general at the time of loss", the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the normal-to-win ready-to-win effect may be executed. Even in this case, when it is determined at step 77AKS35 that the color change effect is being executed and at step 77AKS36 it is determined that the target is not fluctuating, it is not decided to execute the advance notice after establishment of reach. Therefore, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win state is established during execution of the color change effect, it is possible to limit the execution of the advance notice after the ready-to-win state is established. Since the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state is executed after establishment of the ready-to-win state in which the variable display of the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the effect of increasing the expectation of the player may be increased. During the execution of the color change effect, if the advance notice after establishment of the reach is executed before the target changes, the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", disappointing the player and disappointing the player against the color change effect. may also reduce the reliability of In addition, if the color change effect and the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state are executed at the same time, the player may have a complicated impression. Therefore, during the execution of the color change effect, the execution of the advance notice after the ready-to-win is established in response to the variable display before the target is changed is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the loss of the player's confidence in the color change effect and to prevent the player from having a complicated impression.

FIG. 10-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 9 as the effect process during variable display. In this variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step AKS031). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be determined that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step AKS032). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (preview effect control pattern) determined in step AKS014 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is the notice effect period (step AKS032; Yes), control to execute the notice effect is performed (step AKS033).

If it is not the notice effect period (step AKS032; No), or after the control of step AKS033, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the battle zone effect (step 77AKS51). When it is decided at step 77AKS17 of the battle zone effect determination process that the battle zone effect is to be executed, it is determined at step 77AKS51 that it is time to start the battle zone effect as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. be done. In addition, it is not limited to the timing at which the variable display of decorative patterns is started. For example, at any timing during execution of the variable display of decorative patterns, such as a specific timing during all pattern fluctuations, it is the start timing of the battle zone production. may be determined. When it is time to start the battle zone effect (step 77AKS51; Yes), control is performed to start execution of the battle zone effect (step 77AKS52). In step 77AKS52, control processing is performed when the execution of the battle zone effect is started by the drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. When executing the battle zone effect, for example, the display of the background image is changed from the normal background image to the background image corresponding to the battle zone. Also, in the battle zone production, for example, a specific character image may be displayed in a silhouette mode. At step 77AKS52, the CPU 77AK131 performs voice control processing for starting the execution of the battle zone presentation by the voice command supplied to the voice processing circuit 77AK133. When executing the battle zone presentation, the voice presentation using the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed from the normal voice presentation to the voice presentation corresponding to the battle zone.

When it is not the timing to start the battle zone effect (step 77AKS51; No), after the control of step 77AKS52, it is determined whether or not the color change effect is being executed (step 78AKS01). If the color change effect is being performed (step 78AKS01; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing after establishment of a predetermined reach corresponding to the end of the color change effect (step 78AKS02). The color change production is the production control pattern so that the end timing after the establishment of the ready-to-win is reached after the establishment of the ready-to-win where the variable display of the decorative pattern in the target fluctuation becomes the ready-to-win mode, for example, before the timing at which the notice can be executed after the establishment of the ready-to-win. etc. should be set. If it is the end timing after establishment of the ready-to-win state (step 78AKS02; Yes), control is performed to end execution of the color change effect (step 78AKS03). At step 78AKS03, control processing for ending execution of the color change effect is performed by a drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. When the color change effect is terminated, the color in the effect display is returned to the normal color by returning to the drawing processing in the case where the normal color is not changed. When the execution of the color change effect ends, an effect image notifying the end of the color change effect may be displayed in a predetermined color change effect end notification period. The control in step 78AKS03 may include control for displaying on the screen of the image display device 5 an effect image notifying the end of the color change effect by means of a drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132.

If it is not during the color change effect (step 78AKS01; No), if it is not the end timing after establishment of the ready-to-win (step 78AKS02; No), or after the control in step 78AKS03, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period. (step AKS035). Reach effect period, for example in step AKS014 of the variable display start setting process determined in accordance with the variation pattern in the effect control pattern (special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern, etc.), it may be determined in advance. When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step AKS035; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step AKS036). If it is not a reach production period (step AKS035; No), after the control by step AKS036, for example, based on the setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other variable display operation of the decorative pattern (step AKS037), the effect processing during variable display is terminated. In addition, during the variable display of decorative patterns in which the color change effect is not executed, it is suggested which of the color change effect to be executed, the monochrome change or the gold color change, based on the occurrence of the start winning. It may be possible to execute the color change suggesting effect to be performed at a predetermined rate. After the color change suggesting effect is executed, there may be a case where the suggested color change effect is started and a case where the suggested color change effect is not started. When the color change suggesting effect is executed, the execution of the color change suggesting effect may be started at a higher rate than when the color change suggesting effect is not executed. By executing such a color change suggesting effect, it is possible to increase the expectation and the degree of attention to the color change effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step AKS031 (step AKS031; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS038). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step AKS038; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the design confirmation command is received (step AKS038; Yes), for example, by supplying a drawing command corresponding to the design confirmation from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132, the final display result in the variable display of the decorative design Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (determined decoration symbol) as a stop display (step AKS039).

Following the control by step AKS039, it is determined whether or not the battle zone effect is being executed (step 78AKS11). If the battle zone effect is being performed (step 78AKS11; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display of this time is a variable display for the target change of the battle zone effect (step 78AKS12). The target variation of the battle zone production is a variable display corresponding to the judgment result at the time of winning that it is decided to execute the battle zone production, and is a target variable that suggests that the battle zone production is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. display. In the case of the target change of the battle zone effect (step 78AKS12; Yes), control is performed to end the execution of the battle zone effect (step 78AKS13). In step 78AKS13, control processing is performed when the execution of the battle zone effect is terminated by the drawing command supplied from the CPU 77AK131 to the VDP 77AK132. By step 78AKS13, the execution of the battle zone effect can be terminated in response to the end of the variable display in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed.

If it is not during the battle zone production (step 78AKS11; No), if it is not the target change of the battle zone production (step 78AKS12; No), or after the control by step 78AKS13, a jackpot start designation command reception waiting time is set in advance. A defined fixed time is set (step AKS040). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step AKS041), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIGS. 10-16 show an effect execution example when the battle zone effect is started. In the battle zone effect, regardless of whether the color change effect is executed or not, the decoration pattern is displayed in a variable manner based on the determination result of step 77AKS17 of the battle zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-12(A). is started, it becomes executable. FIGS. 10-16 (A1) to (C1) show the case of no color change effect in which the color change effect is not executed. FIGS. 10-16 (A2) to (C2), (D2), and (E2) show the case where the monochrome change is executed among the color change effects. FIGS. 10-16 (A3) to (C3) show a case where a golden color change is executed among the color change effects.

In the case of no color change effect, from the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed like the effect execution example 77AK201 shown in FIG. Execution of the battle zone effect is started along with the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern. When it is determined at step 77AKS51 shown in FIGS. 10-15 that it is time to start the battle zone effect, the control at step 77AKS52 makes it possible to start execution of the battle zone effect. In effect execution example 77AK202, the background image is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the battle zone. Also, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed in a silhouette mode. When there is no color change effect, the effect image of the character CH1 displayed in a silhouette mode includes, for example, a contour partial image showing the contour of the character CH1 and an internal specific image having a specific color inside the contour. I wish I could. For the internal partial image, a specific color, such as rainbow color, may be set as the normal color. Furthermore, a character image is displayed to inform the user of a message such as "entering the battle zone". When there is no color change effect, the text image for notifying the message may have a normal color such as blue. After that, in effect execution example 77AK203 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C1), while the display of the character image for notifying the message is erased, a telop display is started that makes it recognizable that the battle zone effect is being executed. ing.

When execution of the battle zone effect is started as in effect execution example 77AK202 shown in FIG. The voice effect using is changed from the normal voice effect to the voice effect corresponding to the battle zone. For example, in the normal voice effect, music phrases PH01 to PH03 are repeatedly reproduced and output. In the voice effect corresponding to the battle zone, when the execution of the battle zone effect such as effect execution example 77AK202 is started, the player can recognize the start of execution of the battle zone effect by reproducing and outputting the music phrase PHA1. should be notified to After that, when the execution of the battle zone effect progresses as in effect execution example 77AK203 shown in FIG. It is only necessary to make it possible to execute voice effects in a mode different from the voice effects by the phrases PH01 to PH03.

When the monochrome change is being executed, from the state in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed like the production execution example 77AK211 shown in FIG. 10-16 (A2), the production execution example 77AK212 shown in FIG. 10-16 (B2) Execution of the battle zone effect is started along with the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern. During execution of the monochrome change, the screen display of the image display device 5 is changed so that a plurality of effect displays, such as a background image, a decorative design, and a part of the preview effect, are displayed in a common grayscale display color. The color has changed to a color different from the normal color. At this time, when the timing for starting the battle zone effect comes, the execution of the battle zone effect can be started, and the background image is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the battle zone. Also, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed in a silhouette mode. When the monochrome change is being executed, the performance image of the character CH1 displayed in the silhouette mode is displayed in a grayscale display color as a whole, for example, so that it changes to a color different from the normal color. The display of a character image that notifies a message such as "entering the battle zone" also changes to a color different from the normal color, for example, by displaying the entire display in a grayscale display color. In this way, when both the monochrome change in the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed, the period during which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed and the period during which the battle zone effect is executed may overlap.

When the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the monochrome change as in the effect execution example 77AK212 shown in FIG. By the control of step 77 AKS52, the sound effect using the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed from the normal sound effect to the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone. At this time, even during execution of the monochrome change, by reproducing and outputting the music phrase PHA1 as in the case where the monochrome change is not executed, the start of execution of the battle zone effect is notified in a way that the player can recognize. Just do it.

Following the effect execution example 77AK212, in the effect execution example 77AK213 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C2), while the display of the character image informing the message is erased, it is possible to recognize that the battle zone effect is being executed. A telop display has started. When the monochrome change is being executed, the telop display may notify a message that allows the user to recognize that the monochrome change is being executed together with the battle zone effect. It suffices if, by means of a telop display for notifying such a message, it is possible to execute a parallel notification effect for notifying that the monochrome change in the color change effect is being executed in parallel with the battle zone effect. The parallel notification effect may be performed as an audio effect using sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R in place of or in addition to the telop display. In addition, the parallel notification effect may be executed using any effect device. When the execution of the battle zone effect progresses during the execution of the monochrome change as in the effect execution example 77AK213, the music phrase PHA2 is reproduced and output in the same manner as in the effect execution example 77AK203 when the monochrome change is not executed. It is only necessary to make it possible to execute the voice effect in a different effect mode from the voice effect by the music phrases PH01 to PH03 in the normal time when the battle zone effect is not executed. During the period when the color change effect is being executed, since the voice effect can be executed in the same effect mode as when the color change effect is not being executed, the monochrome change is not executed even during the execution of the monochrome change. In an effect mode common to the case, an audio effect for reproducing and outputting the songs PHA1 and PHA2 corresponding to the battle zone is executed.

In step 77AKS31 of the notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-13, it is decided to execute the notice during all symbol changes at a predetermined rate even during the execution of the battle mode effect and the color change effect. In one example, it is determined to execute a step-up notice as a notice during all symbol fluctuations. In the effect execution example 77AK214 shown in FIG. 10-16 (D2), the step-up notice is executed during execution of the battle mode effect and the color change effect. In this case, the effect display in the step-up notice changes its color by executing the color change effect, and the whole is displayed in a grayscale display color, for example. In another example, it is decided to execute a story announcement as an announcement during all symbol changes. In the effect execution example 77AK215 shown in FIG. 10-16 (E2), the story announcement is executed during the execution of the battle mode effect and the color change effect. The effect display in the story notice uses a larger image than the effect display in the step-up notice. The effect image used in the story announcement may have a size that can be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, for example. The effect display in the story preview is displayed in the same color as the normal color without changing the color due to the execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect. In this way, during the period in which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the step-up notice can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color, while the effect display in the story notice can be changed in color. It can be executed with a color common to the period when the production is not executed.

When the gold color change is being executed, from the state in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed like the production execution example 77AK221 shown in FIG. 10-16 (A3), the production execution example shown in FIG. 10-16 (B3) Along with the start of the variable display of decorative symbols like 77AK222, the execution of the battle zone effect is started. The screen display of the image display device 5 is changed so that a plurality of effect displays such as a background image, a decorative pattern, a notice effect, and an interface display are displayed in a common gold color during execution of the gold color change. The color at the time has changed to a color different from the color at normal time. At this time, when the timing for starting the battle zone effect comes, the execution of the battle zone effect can be started, and the background image is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode corresponding to the battle zone. Also, an effect image showing the character CH1 is displayed in a silhouette mode. When the golden display is being executed, the effect image of the character CH1 displayed in the silhouette mode changes to a color different from the normal color, for example, by displaying the whole in a golden display color. . The display of the character image that notifies the message "entering the battle zone" is also changed to a color different from the normal color, for example, by displaying the entire display in a gold-based display color. In this way, when both the golden color change in the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed, the period during which the gold color change in the color change effect is executed and the period during which the battle zone effect is executed may overlap.

Even when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the golden color change as in the effect execution example 77AK222 shown in FIG. 2, the sound effect using the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R is changed from the normal sound effect to the sound effect corresponding to the battle zone. At this time, even during execution of the gold-tone change, the player can recognize the start of execution of the battle zone effect by reproducing and outputting the music phrase PHA1 in the same manner as when the gold-tone change is not executed. should be notified.

Following the effect execution example 77AK222, in the effect execution example 77AK223 shown in FIG. 10-16 (C3), while the display of the character image informing the message is erased, it is possible to recognize that the battle zone effect is being executed. A telop display has started. When the golden color change is being executed, the telop display may notify a recognizable message that the gold color change is being executed together with the battle zone effect. With the telop display for notifying such a message, it is possible to execute a parallel notification effect for notifying that the golden color change in the color change effect is being executed in parallel with the battle zone effect. The parallel notification effect may be performed as an audio effect using sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R in place of or in addition to the telop display. In addition, the parallel notification effect may be executed using any effect device. When the execution of the battle zone effect progresses during the execution of the gold color change as in the effect execution example 77AK223, the battle zone effect is executed by reproducing and outputting the music phrase PHA2 as in the effect execution examples 77AK203 and 77AK213. It is only necessary to make it possible to execute voice effects in a mode different from the voice effects of the music phrases PH01 to PH03 in the normal time when the music phrases PH01 to PH03 are not used. During the period when the color change effect is being executed, the sound effect can be executed in the same effect mode as when the color change effect is not being executed, so even during the execution of the gold change effect, the gold change effect can be executed. In the same effect mode as when not playing, the voice effect of reproducing and outputting the songs PHA1 and PHA2 corresponding to the battle zone is executed.

When a step-up notice is executed as a notice during all pattern changes during execution of a golden change in the color change production, the production display in the step-up notice changes the color due to the execution of the color change production, for example, the whole Displayed in gold color. When a story notice is executed as a notice during all pattern changes during execution of a gold color change in the color change production, the production display in the story notice changes in color due to the execution of the color change production, for example, the whole is gold. is displayed in the display color of . The effect display in the story notice uses a larger image than the effect display in the step-up notice. In this way, during the period in which the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the step-up notice can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color, and the effect display in the story notice can be changed in color. It can be done with colors that change according to the presentation and the corresponding colors. Note that the effect display in the story preview may be displayed in the same color as the normal color without changing the color due to the execution of the golden color change in the color change effect. In this case, during the period in which the gold color change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the step-up notice can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color, while the effect in the story notice The display can be executed in the same color as during the period when the color change effect is not executed.

The effect display in the step-up notice effect is changed according to the color change effect during the period in which the color change effect is executed, regardless of which of the monochrome change and the golden color change in the color change effect is executed. It can be done with colors and corresponding colors. The effect display in the story notice effect can be executed in the same color as the period in which the color change effect is not executed during the period when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, out of the monochrome change and the golden change in the color change effect. On the other hand, during the period in which the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, it can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color. In this way, the plurality of advance notice effects are the first notice effect that can be executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color during the period in which the color change effect is executed, regardless of the color changed by the color change effect. A second advance notice effect that can be executed with a different color during a period in which the color change effect is executed according to the effect and the color changed by the color change effect may be included. Depending on the color to be changed by the color change effect, the second notice effect can be executed with the same color as the period when the color change effect is not executed in the period when the color change effect is executed, and in the color change effect. It is sufficient to have correspondingly changed colors and cases where the corresponding colors are feasible.

FIG. 10-17 shows an example of control of the timing of starting and ending execution of the color change effect and the battle zone effect. Execution of the color change effect can be started at the timing when the game medium passes through the start area provided in the first start prize winning port or the second start prize winning port as the occurrence of the start prize winning. After that, in the variable display as the target variation of the color change performance, the execution of the color change performance is completed at the timing provided after the ready-to-win state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. Execution of the battle zone effect can be started at the start timing of the battle zone effect accompanying the start of the variable display based on the winning determination result included in the reserved display data. After that, in the variable display which becomes the target variation of the battle zone production, the execution of the battle zone production ends at the timing when the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the final stop pattern is derived and displayed by the stop display.

FIG. 10-17(A) shows a control example 78AKC01 of the timing of starting and ending execution of the color change effect. In the control example 78AKC01, execution of the color change effect based on the passage of the game ball through the starting area is started at the timing T01 when the starting prize is generated. After that, through a shift timing associated with the start of variable display different from the target variation, the variable display as the target variation is started, and the execution of the color change performance is finished at the timing T02 provided after the ready-to-win establishment. In the notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-13, it is possible to decide to execute the notice after the ready-to-win state is established in step 77AKS37 in the case of the target variation of the color change effect. Thus, when it is determined to execute the notice after establishment of the reach, the notice after establishment of the reach can be executed in the period after the timing T02. In this way, by executing the color change effect during the period from timing T01 to timing T02, it is possible to change a plurality of effect displays to colors different from normal. It should be noted that, for example, at any timing included in the period from timing T01 to timing T02, such as the shift timing associated with the start of variable display different from the target variation and the timing at which the variable display that becomes the target variation is started, the color change effect can be performed. is temporarily terminated, and after a predetermined waiting period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, effect control may be performed such that the color change effect is restored.

FIG. 10-17(B) shows a control example 78AKC02 of the timing of starting and ending execution of the battle zone effect. In control example 78AKC02, at timing T11, which is the shift timing associated with the start of a new variable display, after the start winning has occurred, the execution of the battle zone effect based on the determination result at the time of winning included in the pending display data is started. . After that, the variable display as the target variation is started, and after the ready-to-win establishment and the notice after the ready-to-win establishment are executed, the execution of the battle zone effect is finished at the timing T12 of the end of the target fluctuation by the derived display of the final stop symbol. In the notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-13, regardless of whether or not the battle zone effect is being executed, it is possible to decide to execute the notice after the ready-to-win state is established in step 77AKS37. Thus, in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T12, by executing the battle zone effect, it is possible to suggest that the game state is controlled to the big win game state at a predetermined rate.

After starting execution of the color change effect at timing T01 in control example 78AKC01 and before ending execution of the color change effect at timing T02, execution of the battle zone effect is started at timing T11 in control example 78AKC02. be. After starting execution of the battle zone effect at timing T11 in control example 78AKC02 and before ending execution of the battle zone effect at timing T12, execution of the color change effect ends at timing T02 in control example 78AKC01. . Therefore, during the period from timing T11 to timing T02, both the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed, and the periods during which the respective effects are executed overlap. During the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02, the battle zone effect is executed with the color changed according to the color change effect and the corresponding color. For example, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the battle zone effect is executed in a grayscale display color in the period from timing T11 to timing T02, thereby changing according to the monochrome change. A battle zone effect is executed with colors and colors in a monochrome mode corresponding to the colors. Further, when the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, during the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02, by executing the effect display in the battle zone effect in a golden display color, A battle zone effect is executed by the changed color and the corresponding golden color.

During the period from timing T02 to timing T12, the battle zone effect is executed with the normal color in response to the termination of the color change effect. For example, in the period from timing T02 to timing T12 after the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the battle zone effect is returned from the monochrome mode color to the normal mode color and executed. After the production is finished, the battle zone production can be executed with normal colors. In addition, after the gold color change in the color change effect is executed, the effect display in the battle zone effect is returned from the golden color to the normal color during the period from timing T02 to timing T12. After the color change effect is completed, the battle zone effect can be executed with the normal color. In this way, the battle zone effect can be finished at a timing later than the color change effect, and after the color change effect is finished, the battle zone effect can be executed in normal colors.

FIGS. 10-18 show examples of execution of effects corresponding to variable displays that are target variations of color change effects and battle zone effects. In the effect execution example 78AK101 shown in FIG. 10-18(A1), when the color change effect is not executed and the color change effect is not executed, the variable display that becomes the target change of the battle zone effect is started. In the effect execution example 78AK102 shown in FIG. 10-18(A2), when the monochrome change in the color change effect is being executed, the variable display that becomes the target change of the battle zone effect is started. In the effect execution example 78AK103 shown in FIG. 10-18 (A3), when the golden color change in the color change effect is being executed, the variable display that becomes the target change of the battle zone effect is started.

After that, in the effect execution example 78AK111 shown in FIG. 10-18(B), the execution of the color change effect is completed at the timing T02 provided after the ready-to-win is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. . More specifically, as in effect execution example 78AK102, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, at timing T02 after that, the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-15 is performed. At step 78AKS02, it is determined that it is the end timing after reaching establishment. By the control of step 78AKS03 based on this determination result, the execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect is terminated, and the effect display on the screen of the image display device 5 including the effect display in the battle zone effect is changed to the normal color. bring back. Further, as in the effect execution example 78AK103, when the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, step 78AKS02 of the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. , it is determined that it is the end timing after reaching establishment. By the control of step 78AKS03 based on this determination result, the execution of the gold color change in the color change effect is terminated, and the effect display on the screen of the image display device 5 including the effect display in the battle zone effect is changed to the normal color. return to In addition, in the effect execution example 78AK111, by displaying an effect image informing a message of "reach!"

At step 78AKS03 of the effect processing during variable display, effect control may be performed in accordance with the end of the color change effect so that a effect image notifying the end of the color change effect is displayed. As in effect execution example 78AK102, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, an effect image may be displayed to notify the message "Monochrome time is over!". The effect image that indicates the end of the monochrome change in the color change effect may be displayed in a grayscale display color, or may be displayed in a display color different from the grayscale display color. As in the effect execution example 78AK103, when the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, an effect image notifying the message "Gold time is over!" may be displayed. The effect image for notifying the end of the golden color change in the color change effect may be displayed in a gold color, or may be displayed in a color different from the gold color. The effect image notifying the end of the color change effect may be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . With such a display, when the color change effect ends, the scene in which the display color is changed is concealed, and discomfort caused by the change in the display color can be suppressed.

In the effect execution example 78AK112 shown in FIG. 10-18(C), the group display notice is executed in the notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state. Since the execution of the color change effect is completed when the advance notice such as the group display notice is executed after establishment of the ready-to-win state, regardless of the color changed according to the color change effect, the effect display is displayed according to the notice after establishment of the ready-to-reach effect. can be colored. In the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, if it is determined in step 77AKS35 that the color change effect is being performed and if it is determined in step 77AKS36 that the target is not fluctuating, step 77AKS37 is not executed. It is not decided to execute the notice after the reach is established. Therefore, when the color change effect is being executed, by restricting the execution of the notice after the establishment of the ready-to-win until the variable display that becomes the target variation is executed, it is possible to prevent the color of the effect display in the notice after the establishment of the reach from changing. can be prevented.

In the effect execution example 78AK113 shown in FIG. 10-18(D), the effect display is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win after establishment of the ready-to-win. At this time, the battle zone effect is continuously executed, and the display of the background image and the telop display correspond to the battle zone effect. Further, by executing the ready-to-win effect using the effect image showing the character CH1, the effect display related to the battle zone effect may be executable. After that, in the effect execution example 78AK114 shown in FIG. 10-18(E), the confirmed decorative pattern of the big hit combination is derived and displayed as the final stop pattern, and the execution of the battle zone effect ends at the timing T12 of the end of the target variation. there is In this way, the battle zone effect and the color change effect can be executed with the same variable display as the target variation, while the battle zone effect can be finished at a timing later than the color change effect, and the color change effect can be executed. After the end, the battle zone production can be executed in normal colors. In addition, when the same variable display is executed as the target variation for the battle zone production and the color change production, in the variable display that becomes the target change, the production mode is different from the case where the color change production is not executed. reach production may be executed. Such a ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win may be a special effect display when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during execution of the monochrome change or golden color change in the color change effect.

10-19 show configuration examples of effect displays including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn, for example, divided into a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-19, layers AKL0 to AKL4 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Of these layers, the layer AKL0 is a display layer with the highest display priority, and draws a rendering image that becomes a gold effect when a gold color change in the color change rendering is executed so that it can be displayed. The layer AKL1 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer AKL0, and is a variable display including a small pattern display area AKA1 as a first interface display area and a variable display compatible display area AKA2 as a second interface display area. A related effect image or the like is drawn so that it can be displayed. The layer AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer AKL1, and is drawn so as to be able to display the effect images of the preview effect included in the full-screen preview effect, such as the story preview among the previews during all pattern fluctuations. . The layer AKL3 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer AKL2. A performance image of a general notice performance not included in the full-screen notice performance, such as a step-up notice among the notices during pattern fluctuation, is drawn so as to be displayable. The layer AKL4 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image as a background image so that it can be displayed.

A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by display priority information or the like included in the display list, for example. In the display list, the effect image placed on layer AKL4 is designated as the first drawing target, and thereafter, the effect images placed on each display layer are designated as drawing targets in the order of layers AKL3, AKL2, AKL1, and AKL0. good too. Also, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on the layers AKL0 to AKL4 may be set with a Z value, which is the depth value used when superimposing and drawing the respective effect images. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the layers AKL0 to AKL4 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value is arranged on the nearer side (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, and the display priority of the image is higher. You can do it like this.

Note that, for example, the effect image for the gold color effect drawn on the layer AKL0 becomes a drawing target when the gold color change in the color change effect is executed, while the gold color display in the color change effect is executed. If there is none, it will not be drawn. Further, for example, the effect image of the notice effect drawn on the layer AKL2 is a target for drawing when the full screen notice effect such as the story notice among the notices during all pattern changes is being executed. is not executed, it will not be drawn. A layer may be provided on which the effect image is not drawn, depending on whether or not the effect image is to be drawn. Alternatively, layers on which effect images are not drawn may be excluded from the control targets depending on whether they are to be drawn. For example, the effect image showing the decoration pattern and the effect image of the preview effect drawn on the layer AKL3 may actually be effect images drawn on different layers according to their respective display priorities. , are drawn on the same layer AKL3 in order to explain the image processing associated with the execution of the color change effect.

When the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the small pattern display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area are also colored differently from the normal colors. The display color changes to a different golden color. Therefore, the layer AKL0, which draws the effect image for the gold effect, is set to have a higher display priority than the layer AKL1, which draws the effect image related to the variable display. On the other hand, the layer AKL1 that draws the effect image related to the variable display may be set to have a higher display priority than the layer AKL0 that draws the effect image for the gold effect. The display priority may be differentiated between the small pattern display area AKA1, which is the first interface display area, and the variable display-compatible display area AKA2, which is the second interface display area. For example, the layer that draws the effect image of the small pattern display area AKA1, which is the first interface display area, is set to have the highest display priority, and the layer that draws the effect image of the variable display compatible display area AKA2, which is the second interface display area. A layer for drawing an image may be set as the layer AKL1 so that the display priority thereof is lower than that of the layer AKL0 for drawing the effect image for the gold effect. In addition, the display priority according to the layer for drawing various effect images can be arbitrarily set based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

When the VDP 77AK132 writes the image data read out from the effect data memory 77AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 77AK145 or the like, the VDP 77AK132 may determine the display priority by comparing the Z values. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image with a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image with a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the small value as the Z value has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the large value as the Z value. It can be arranged on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It can be arranged on the back side (rear side) as seen. Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be a reverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower Z value than a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high. In this manner, rendering processing of effect images corresponding to a plurality of display layers is executed to generate a display image AKX1 including effect images corresponding to a plurality of effect displays. The display image AKX1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after superimposing the images drawn on the layers AKL0 to AKL5 as a plurality of display layers with different display priorities.

When a monochrome change is executed in the color change effect, the effect images drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are converted into grayscale display colors, thereby being changed to colors different from normal colors. In this way, the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are included in the monochrome change target for changing the color of the effect image designated as the drawing object to a color different from the normal color when the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect. When a gold color change is executed in the color change effect, the effect image to be drawn on the layers AKL1 to AKL4 is changed to a color different from the normal color by converting the display color of the gold color. In this way, the layers AKL1 to AKL4 are included in the gold-tone change object that changes the color of the effect image designated as the drawing object to a color different from the normal color when executing the gold-tone change in the color change effect. be

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing an example of color change synthesis processing executed by the VDP77AK132. Color change synthesis processing is executed, for example, when a display list including drawing commands for color blending as a color overlay is transferred based on the instruction code decoded by the instruction decoder of the VDP77AK132. Color overlay is an image processing function that the drawing circuit 77AK144 of the VDP77AK132 has, for example, and by applying a conversion formula prepared in advance to the target image data, an image with new colors can be formed.

When the color change synthesizing process is started, the image data to be converted is read (step 79AKS01). The conversion target image data is image data whose color is to be converted by color blending as a color overlay in order to execute the color change effect. For example, in the VDP 77AK132, image data to be converted is read out from the performance data memory 77AK123 or the like, and stored in the work area of the VRAM 77AK145 or the like for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit 77AK141 of the VDP 77AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 77AK123 and the buffer area of the external RAM 77AK125 or VRAM 77AK145 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command. The data may be transferred to an area or the like and stored. Image data to be converted is specified by a drawing command as image data representing an effect image to be drawn on one of the layers AKL1 to AKL4 among the plurality of display layers.

After step 79AKS01, the image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the low-priority display layer (step 79AKS02). At this time, among the image data stored in the work area in step 79AKS01, the image data representing the effect images drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are stored in the frame buffer of the VRAM 77AK145. For example, the VDP 77AK132 first causes the graphics decoder 77AK143 and the drawing circuit 77AK144 to store in the frame buffer image data representing an effect image to be drawn on the layer AKL4 specified by the drawing command. As a result, the effect image is drawn on the layer AKL4. Next, the VDP 77AK 132 causes the graphics decoder 77AK 143 and the drawing circuit 77AK 144 to store the image data representing the effect image to be drawn on the layer AKL3 specified by the drawing command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. . At this time, inter-pixel arithmetic processing may be executed in accordance with the drawing command. In this way, the effect image in layer AKL3 is rendered superimposably combined with the effect image in layer AKL4. Up to this point, the effect images of the respective layers AKL3 and AKL4 are rendered in full color, which is the normal color.

Following step 79AKS02, color blend image processing, which is monochrome conversion, is executed (step 79AKS03). In step 79AKS03, the respective values of the R component, the G component, and the B component of each pixel of the effect image in the layers AKL3 and AKL4 drawn in step 79AKS02 are converted using a conversion formula for changing to a grayscale display color. be done. As a result, the effect images drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 change to a grayscale color different from the normal color.

After step 79AKS03, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the display layer of high priority (step 79AKS04). At this time, among the image data stored in the work area in step 79AKS01, the image data representing the effect images drawn on the layers AKL1 and AKL2 are stored in the frame buffer of the VRAM 77AK145. For example, the VDP77AK132 stores image data representing an effect image to be drawn on the layer AKL2 specified by the drawing command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. Note that layer AKL2 draws an effect image such as a story notice included in the full screen notice effect. Data need not be stored in the frame buffer. Also, the VDP 77AK 132 stores the image data representing the effect image to be drawn on the layer AKL1 specified by the drawing command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. At this time, inter-pixel arithmetic processing may be executed in accordance with the drawing command. In this way, the effect images on the layers AKL1 and AKL2 are rendered superimposably combined with the effect images on the layers AKL3 and AKL4. At this time, the effect images of the layers AKL3 and AKL4 are rendered in grayscale colors, whereas the effect images of the layers AKL1 and AKL2 are rendered in full color which is the normal color.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a drawing command for gold conversion is received (step 79AKS05). At this time, if there is no drawing command for gold color conversion (step 79AKS05; No), the color change synthesis process is terminated. On the other hand, when the drawing command for gold conversion is received (step 79AKS05; Yes), color blend image processing for gold conversion is executed (step 79AKS06). At step 79AKS06, the values of the R, G, and B components of each pixel of the effect image drawn in the frame buffer are converted using a conversion formula for changing the display color to gold. At this time, each pixel of the effect image drawn on the layers AKL1 and AKL2 may be changed to a grayscale color as in step 79AKS03 and then changed to a golden color. If the effect image to be changed to a golden color is directly changed from the normal color to the golden color, for example, if the color is uneven in the normal color, the golden color will be unnatural. As a result, there is a risk of giving the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, the effect image to be changed to a golden color is first changed from the normal color to a grayscale color, and then changed to a golden color. As a result, for example, even when there is a bias in color tone in the normal color, the gold color becomes natural, and the sense of incongruity given to the player can be suppressed.

When such image processing in step 79AKS06 is executed, for example, the image processing in step 79AKS03 changes the image data to be displayed from normal colors to display colors using grayscale colors. to reduce the number of colors in the image data. A rendered image of a display color using grayscale colors is a multi-gradation single-color image represented by a single color with different lightness depending on the pixel position. After that, in the image processing in step 79AKS06, image processing corresponding to display colors using gold colors is applied by executing color blend image processing using a conversion formula corresponding to color overlay. As a result, the effect images corresponding to the plurality of effect displays drawn on the layers AKL1 to AKL4 are changed to a common color such as a display color using gold colors.

When the image processing in step 79AKS06 is performed, the effect for gold is applied (step 79AKS07), and then the color change synthesis process is terminated. At step 79AKS07, among the image data stored in the work area at step 79AKS01, the image data representing the effect image drawn on layer AKL0 is stored in the frame buffer of VRAM 77AK145. For example, the VDP77AK132 stores image data representing an effect image to be rendered on the layer AKL0 specified by the rendering command while synthesizing it with the image data stored in the frame buffer. Layer AKL0 draws an effect image that is an effect for gold, and this effect image may have a color corresponding to the display color of gold in the normal state. By executing the image processing for applying the gold effect in step 79AKS07, the player can easily recognize the display color using the gold color, and the player's impression of the gold color change in the color change effect is enhanced. be able to.

In this way, when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, the normal color is changed to the grayscale color for the effect image drawn on the layers AKL3 and AKL4 by the color overlay. done. When the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the effect image drawn on the layers AKL1 to AKL4 is changed from the normal color to the grayscale color by the color overlay, and then the grayscale color is changed. A process is performed to change the color of the image to a golden color. In the color change synthesizing process, the common color change process of steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05 can be executed when the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect and when the golden color change is executed in the color change effect. In this way, by being able to execute the common color change process, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while reducing the processing load of changing the color of the effect display.

In the configuration example shown in FIGS. 10-19, a rendering image that is an effect for gold is drawn on the layer AKL0. In step 79AKS07 of the color change synthesis process, the effect image is drawn on the layer AKL0, which has a higher display priority than the layers AKL1 to AKL4 to which the image processing corresponding to the display color using gold colors is applied. Effect display by the effect for gold can be given priority over the effect display changed to gold color. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the golden color change in the color change effect and improve the interest of the color change effect.

As described above, in the characterizing portions 77AK to 79AK, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, such as the period from the timing T01 to the timing T02 of the control example 78AKC01 shown in FIG. A period from the timing when the game ball passes through the starting area provided in the mouth to the timing provided after the ready-to-win state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode after the variable display to change the target is started. , it is possible to execute a color change effect that changes the colors of a plurality of effect displays displayed during that period.

The battle zone effect suggesting control to the jackpot gaming state included in the advantageous state is the period from timing T11 to timing T12 of the control example 78AKC02 shown in FIG. 10-17(B). It can be executed in a period at least partially different from the period in which the effect is executed. When both the color change effect and the battle zone effect are executed, the period from timing T11 to timing T02 of the control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02 shown in FIGS. 10-17(A) and 10-17(B). In addition, the period during which the color change effect is executed may overlap with the period during which the battle zone effect is executed. In the period during which the battle zone effect is executed without overlapping with the period during which the color change effect is executed, such as the period from timing T02 to timing T12 in control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02, FIGS. 10-16 (C1) shown in production execution examples 77AK202, 77AK203 and production execution examples 78AK111 to 78AK113 shown in FIGS. Run. In the period during which the color change effect is executed and the battle zone effect is executed, such as the period from the timing T11 to the timing T02 in the control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02, FIGS. 10-16 (B2) and 10-16 Effect execution examples 77AK212 and 77AK213 shown in (C2), and effect execution examples 77AK222 and 77AK223 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B3) and 10-16 (C3). It is executed by the special color corresponding to the color changed according to the production.

When such a color change effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is a normal color corresponding to no color change effect or a special color corresponding to a monochrome change or a gold change in the color change effect, For example, part of the battle zone production, such as voice production corresponding to the battle zone, can be executed in a common production mode. Effect execution examples 77AK212 and 77AK213 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B2) and 10-16 (C2), and effect execution examples 77AK222 shown in FIGS. 10-16 (B3) and 10-16 (C3) , and 77AK223, special colors are used to correspond to monochrome changes and golden color changes in the color change effect. In this case, like the production execution examples 77AK202 and 77AK203 shown in FIGS. , music phrases PHA1 and PHA2, it becomes possible to execute voice effects corresponding to the battle zone in a common effect mode. In this way, regardless of whether the colors are normal colors or special colors, a part of the battle zone production can be executed in a common production mode. Even if there is, the player can easily recognize that the battle zone performance is being executed, the player can pay attention to both the color change performance and the battle zone performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the color change effect and the battle zone effect can be executed, the color change effect reaches in the variable display that becomes the target change, like the timing T02 of the control example 78AKC01 shown in FIG. 10-17(A). It can be terminated at a timing provided after establishment. On the other hand, the battle zone effect ends the target variation by deriving and displaying the final stop symbol in the variable display as the target variation, like the timing T12 of the control example 78AKC02 shown in FIG. 10-17(B). It can be terminated at the timing of Thus, the battle zone effect can be ended at a timing later than the color change effect. In the period from timing T02 to timing T12 in control examples 78AKC01 and 78AKC02, during which the battle zone effect is executed after the color change effect ends, the effects shown in FIGS. As in execution examples 78AK111 to 78AK113, the battle zone effect can be executed in normal colors. In this way, since the battle zone production can be executed in normal colors after the color change production is completed, the player can easily recognize that the battle zone production continues to be executed while the color change production is completed. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color change presentation and the battle zone presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As the color change effect, as in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13 shown in FIG. 10-9(C) and FIG. - Any of a plurality of effects including a gold color change that changes the display color using gold color, such as the effect execution examples 77AKH22 and 77AKH23 shown in 10 (C) and FIG. 10-10 (D) is executable. In the color change synthesizing process shown in FIG. 10-20, steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05 are used in the case of changing the display color to gray scale corresponding to monochrome change and to the case of changing to gold color corresponding to gold color change. It is possible to perform common color change processing in In this way, since the common color change processing can be executed, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while reducing the processing load for changing the color of the effect display.

(Modified example of characteristic portions 77AK to 79AK)
The color change effect is to reduce the range of any of the color attributes such as hue, saturation, and brightness to a narrower range than the normal color, so that the various colors of multiple effects can be shared. Any effect that changes the color may be used. Instead of display colors using grayscale colors or display colors using gold colors, or in addition to display colors using grayscale colors or display colors using gold colors, for example, By displaying a multi-gradation monochromatic image using blue, green, red, and other arbitrary colors, the colors change from the normal colors of multiple presentation displays. It would be nice if it could be done. Instead of the color change effect, or in addition to the color change effect, for example, it may be possible to execute a pattern change effect in which various patterns of a plurality of effect displays are changed to a common pattern. In addition, it suffices if, as a special effect, a visibility change effect can be executed in which a plurality of effect displays are changed to an arbitrary display mode with common visibility by effect control at least partly common to the color change effect.

The specific effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state is not limited to the battle zone effect, but is based on the result of the winning judgment corresponding to the pending display, such as by displaying a different effect image prepared in advance from the normal time. , any effect that can suggest that the control is in an advantageous state. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may be any game state or presentation state in which the player's advantage is higher than the normal state. For example, a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state may be used as an advantageous state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and the execution is possible in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). A game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10"), may be regarded as an advantageous state.

In the above embodiment, under the control of step 77AKS07 shown in FIG. 10-7, during the period when the color change effect is being executed, the sound effect is executed in the same effect mode as during the period when the color change effect is not being executed. described as possible. On the other hand, instead of or in addition to the voice effect, for example, lighting effects by lighting decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, movable object operation effects by the operation of the movable body 32, etc. At least a part of the effects by the arbitrary effect devices provided in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether or not the color change effect is executed.

During the period in which the color change effect is being executed, the sound effect may be executed in a different effect mode from the period in which the color change effect is not being executed. However, when execution of the battle zone effect is started during execution of the color change effect, the audio effect corresponding to the battle zone may be executed preferentially over the audio effect corresponding to the color change. As a result, a part of the battle zone effect, such as the voice effect included in the battle zone effect, may be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether the color change effect is executed. In place of or in addition to the sound effect, the battle zone effect includes at least a part of the effect by any effect device provided in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a light emission effect, a movable body motion effect, and others. In this case, part of the effects included in this battle zone effect may be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether or not the color change effect is executed.

When the execution of the battle zone performance is started during execution of the color change performance, the voice performance corresponding to the color change may be preferentially executed over the voice performance corresponding to the battle zone. For example, when the execution of the battle zone effect is started during execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect, the voice effect corresponding to the battle zone is preferentially executed over the voice effect corresponding to the monochrome change. On the other hand, if the execution of the battle zone effect is started during the execution of the gold color change in the color change effect, the voice effect corresponding to the gold color change is given priority over the voice effect corresponding to the battle zone. Run. Here, the battle zone effect may be executed at a rate according to the variable display result so that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of the monochrome change, and the expectation of a big win is higher than that of the gold color change. As a result, part of the battle zone production, such as the voice production included in the battle zone production, is a common production when the color change production is executed in the first mode and when the color change production is not executed. On the other hand, when the color change effect is performed in the second mode, it may be possible to perform in a different effect mode than when the color change effect is not performed. When the battle zone effect is executed during execution of the golden color change in the color change effect, the voice effect can be executed in a special effect mode different from the case where the battle zone effect is not executed during the gold color change. There may be.

Even when the golden color change is executed in the color change effect, the layers AKL3 and AKL4 make the color of the effect image designated as the drawing target different from the normal color, similarly to the case where the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect. While the colors are changed to different colors, the layers AKL1 and AKL2 may be controlled so that the colors of the effect images designated as drawing targets are not changed to colors different from normal colors. In this way, the monochrome change target and the gold color change target are both layers AKL3 and AKL4, and layers AKL1 and AKL2 may not be included. In this case, the small pattern display area AKA1, which is the first interface display area, and the variable display-compatible display area AKA2, which is the second interface display area, maintain their normal colors without changing. The effect display in the story notice effect is the same color as the period in which the color change effect is not executed, regardless of whether the color change effect is a monochrome change or a golden color change. may be executable by

If layers AKL1 and AKL2 are not included in the golden change target, in the color change synthesis processing shown in FIG. should be done. In this case, after executing the image processing corresponding to the gold color change in steps 79AKS06 and 79AKS07, step 79AKS05 may be performed. Even in such a case, the color change processing by steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05 in the color change synthesis processing is common processing in the case where the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed and the case where the gold color change in the color change effect is executed. is executable as

The timing to end the color change effect is, for example, the timing when one or more pseudo-continuous fluctuations are executed before the ready-to-win establishment, the timing when a specific advance notice effect is executed, and the decorative pattern that is the specific chance eye. The timing of the stop display, the timing of execution of a development effect that develops from the reach effect of normal reach to the reach effect of super reach, or the timing of execution of a specific cut-in effect during the execution of reach effect. , the timing at which a specific movable body action effect is executed, and any other arbitrary timing after the execution of the variable display that becomes the target variation is started and before the final stop symbol is derived and displayed and the execution of the variable display is completed. may be When it is possible to end the color change performance at any one of a plurality of timings, the degree of expectation for big win may differ according to the timing at which the color change performance is ended. For example, by ending the color change effect at a later timing out of a plurality of timings, the timing of ending the color change effect increases as the execution period of the color change effect increases, so that the degree of expectation for the big win increases. may be determined. The timing for ending the color change effect may be set differently depending on whether or not the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win state is executed during the execution of the variable display that causes the target variation. The timing of ending the battle zone production may be a timing that ends later than the color change production, and before the final stop pattern is derived and displayed in the variable display that becomes the target variation and the execution of the variable display is completed. may be the timing of

The rate at which the battle zone effect is executed may be varied depending on whether or not the color change effect is being executed. For example, when the color change effect is being executed, it may be possible to execute the battle zone effect at a higher rate than when the color change effect is not being executed. If the display result of the variable display that causes the target change is a "big hit", it is possible to execute the battle zone effect at a high rate during the execution of the color change effect, and the display result of the variable display that becomes the target change is "losing". , it may be possible to execute the battle zone effect at a low rate during execution of the color change effect.

The story notice is included in the full-screen notice effect, and by displaying the notice effect image on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, it is limited to what is executed using an image larger than the step-up notice. Instead, even when displaying an effect image for notice on a part of the display screen, it may be possible to use an image larger than the step-up notice. Not limited to story notices and step-up notices, when the second notice effect is executed using an image larger than the first notice effect, the color change effect is executed even during the period in which the color change effect is executed. There may be times when it is feasible with no periods and common colors.

The display that does not change the color even if the color change effect is executed is replaced with the small pattern display area AKA1 or the second interface display area AKA2 that serves as the first interface display area, or the small pattern display that serves as the first interface display area. In addition to the area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2, a notification display related to variable display, a notification display related to the game, a notification display related to the effect setting, a notification display related to the occurrence of an abnormality, or a combination of some or all of these are included. You can

The notification display related to the variable display may include display of the fourth symbol, display of the remaining number of variable displays, display of the remaining time of the variable display, or a combination of some or all of these. The fourth design may be variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in synchronization with the special design or the decoration design. The variable display of the fourth pattern is either a small pattern display area AKA1 serving as a first interface display area or a display area AKA2 corresponding to variable display serving as a second interface display area, or a small pattern display. Display control that repeats display and non-display with a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth pattern display area that is provided separately from the area AKA1 and the variable display compatible display area AKA3 and that serves as a third interface display area. It is realized by continuing The display result in the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbols. The remaining number of variable display display is the remaining number of variable display where time saving control and probability variable control are performed, or color change production, battle zone production, and other variable display that will be the target change of the notice production that will be a pre-reading notice. It is sufficient if the number of remaining times is displayed in a identifiable manner. The remaining time of the variable display can be specified as the remaining time until the end of the variable display, or the remaining time until a specific effect is executed during the variable display in the last variable display where the time saving control and the variable probability control are performed. Anything that is displayed in the Alternatively, the remaining time of the variable display is the remaining time until the end of the variable display, or the execution of a specific effect during the variable display, for the color change effect, battle zone effect, and other variable displays that change the target of the advance notice effect. It is sufficient if the remaining time until the time is completed is displayed in a identifiable manner.

The game-related notification display may include a launch promotion display, an electric chew opening display, a payout number display, an area passage display, or a combination of some or all of these. The shooting promotion display may be a display that prompts the shooting of a game ball in a specific direction, for example, by right-handed notification or left-handed display. The electric chew open display may indicate that the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to an open state in which the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole in a identifiable manner. The display of the number of payouts may display the number of game balls paid out as prize balls so as to be identifiable. The area passing display may indicate that the game ball has passed through a specific passing area provided in the game area so as to be identifiable.

The display related to effect setting may include volume setting display, light amount setting display, mode selection display, or a combination of some or all of these. The volume setting display may be anything as long as the volume setting that can be changed by the player's operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified. The light amount setting display may be anything as long as the setting of the light amount that can be changed by the operation of the player in the pachinko game machine 1 can be specified. The mode selection display may be anything as long as the setting of the production mode that can be selected by the operation of the player in the pachinko game machine 1 can be specified.

The notification display regarding the occurrence of an abnormality is a display for notifying an error that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a door opening error, an illegal prize winning error, a switch detection error, a prize ball payout error, a magnet error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, and a full error. Tongue errors, out-of-ball errors, stuck-in-ball errors, processor errors, memory errors, effect device errors, or a combination of some or all of these may be displayed so as to be identifiable.

In the above-described embodiment, in the variable display in which the judgment result at the time of winning is "general at the time of losing", the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect of the normal ready-to-win may be executed. 10-13, if the ready-to-reach state occurs before the target changes during execution of the color change effect, it is determined in step 77AKS36 that there is no target change. By doing so, it is restricted so that the notice is not executed after the reach is established. On the other hand, during the execution of the color change effect, by preventing the variable display of the decorative pattern from changing to the ready-to-win mode, it is restricted so that the notice after the ready-to-win is established is not executed before the target changes. You may For example, the winning judgment result that can be notified by the winning judgment result command includes "non-reach confirmation when losing" indicating that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the non-reach confirmation range when losing. good too. The non-reach determination range may be set in advance as a range of random values determined for the non-reach variation pattern regardless of the number of pending memories. In this case, in step 77AKS01 of the pre-reading notice setting process, if a winning judgment result different from "non-reach decision at the time of losing" is included before the winning judgment result of this time, color change restriction is performed. It should be judged as yes. In addition, in step 77AKS14 of the battle zone effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the result of determination at the time of winning is "non-reach determination when losing". If it is not "non-reach determination when losing", the process should proceed to step 77AKS16. As a result, the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win state during the execution of the color change effect or the battle zone effect, and the execution of the advance notice after establishment of the ready-to-win which is the special effect can be restricted.

The timing to start the color change effect is the timing when a predetermined time has passed after the timing when the game ball passed through the start area, the timing when a specific variable display effect is executed, and other times when the game ball passes through the start area. It may be an arbitrary timing before starting the execution of the variable display that becomes the target variation after the target variation. The timing to start the battle zone production may be the timing that will start later than the color change production when the color change production is executed. Timing when fluctuations are executed, timing when a specific notice effect is executed, timing when a decorative pattern that is a specific chance is displayed temporarily, or after reach is established, reach effect of normal reach to reach effect of super reach The timing when a development effect that develops into is executed, the timing when a specific cut-in effect is executed during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the timing when a specific movable body action effect is executed, etc. It may be any timing after the timing and before the execution of the variable display that becomes the target variation is started.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 77AK)
A game machine capable of performing a variable display based on the passage of game media through a starting area and being controllable to an advantageous state for a player, wherein a first display is performed from a timing corresponding to the passage of the game media through the starting area. In the period, a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed during the first period to a common color, and a specific effect executing means that can be executed in two periods, and when the special effect and the specific effect are both executed, the first period and the second period may overlap, and the specific effect executing means In the second period that does not overlap with the first period, the specific effect is performed in normal colors, and in the second period that overlaps with the first period, the specific effect is performed in the colors that have changed according to the special effect and the corresponding special colors. Part of the specific effect can be executed in a common effect mode in the case of the color and in the case of the special color. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The first period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The second period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. The second period that does not overlap with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T02 to timing T12. Execution of the specific effect in normal colors may be performed, for example, when there is no color change effect. The second period that overlaps with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T02. Execution of the specific effect with a special color may be, for example, in the case of a monochrome change or a golden color change due to a color change effect. A part of the specific effect that can be executed in a common effect mode may be, for example, a voice effect for outputting music phrases PHA1 and PHA2.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effects and the specific effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A specific performance can be executed after the execution of the special performance is started, and the execution of the special performance may be restricted after the execution of the specific performance is started. Here, the execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed at step 77AKS01.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation by means of the specific effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a start notification performance for notifying that the execution of the special performance is started, and when the predetermined advance notice performance is executed at the timing when the first period starts, it is given priority over the predetermined notice performance. , the start notification effect may be executed. Here, the start notification effect may be, for example, the message notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH22. The predetermined notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the execution of the special effect is to be started, thereby improving the interest in the game.

It may be possible to display special information regarding the progress of the game, and in the first period, display the special information in the same color as in periods other than the first period. Here, the special information display may be, for example, the information display of the first interface display area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of production execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while properly executing the special information display.

In the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, if the execution of the special effect is determined based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area, the execution of the special effect is executed after the stop display period ends. may be started. Here, the execution of the special effect is started after the end of the stop display period, for example, when the final stop pattern is being derived and displayed in step 77AKS04 and the color change effect start setting is performed in step 77AKS42. and so on.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

The special effects include a first special effect of changing to a first color and a second special effect of changing to a second color different from the first color, and either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Depending on the amount, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may differ. Here, the first special effect may be, for example, the case of monochrome change by color change effect. The second special effect may be, for example, the case of a golden color change by a color change effect.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation through the special effects and improve the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a first notice effect and a second notice effect using an image larger than the first notice effect, and in the first period, the first notice effect is changed in accordance with the special effect and the corresponding color. In the first period, the second notice effect may be executed in the same color as in periods other than the first period. Here, the first notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. The second notice effect may be, for example, a story notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. Execution can be performed with the changed color and the corresponding color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK214. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK215.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the advance notice effect and improve the game interest.

The special performance can be continuously executed until a specific timing during the execution of the target variable display, the special performance can be executed corresponding to the specific timing, and the execution of the special performance is restricted during the first period. You may Here, the specific timing may be, for example, timing T02 corresponding to reach establishment. The special effect may be, for example, an advance notice after establishment of reach. Execution of the special effect may be restricted when, for example, the color change effect is being performed in step 77AKS35.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When the special effect is executed, after reducing the number of colors of the image data to be displayed, image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied to change the color of the screen display. Here, the number of colors of the image data to be displayed may be reduced if, for example, monochrome conversion color blending is executed in step 79AKS03. The image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied, for example, when executing gold conversion color blending in step 79AKS06.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

Effect display may be performed with priority over display using image data to which image processing is applied. Here, the effect display may be, for example, an image display as an effect for gold in the display layer AKL0.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When a specific performance is executed in a second period overlapping with the first period, it may be possible to execute a parallel notification performance for reporting that the special performance is being executed in parallel with the specific performance. Here, the parallel notification effect may be, for example, the telop notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AK213 and 77AK223.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the execution of the special effect and the specific effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 78AK)
A game machine capable of performing a variable display based on the passage of game media through a starting area and being controllable to an advantageous state for a player, wherein a first display is performed from a timing corresponding to the passage of the game media through the starting area. In the period, a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed during the first period to a common color, and a specific effect executing means that can be executed in two periods, and when the special effect and the specific effect are both executed, the first period and the second period may overlap, and the specific effect executing means In the second period that does not overlap with the first period, the specific effect is executed with normal colors, and in the second period that overlaps with the first period, the specific effect is executed with the color changed according to the special effect and the corresponding special color, and the specified The performance can be finished at timing later than the special performance, and the specific performance can be executed in normal colors after the special performance is finished. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The first period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The second period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. The second period that does not overlap with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T02 to timing T12. Execution of the specific effect in normal colors may be performed, for example, when there is no color change effect. The second period that overlaps with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T02. Execution of the specific effect with a special color may be, for example, in the case of a monochrome change or a golden color change due to a color change effect. The timing later than the special effect may be, for example, timing T12. It is possible to execute the specific effect in normal colors, for example, in effect execution examples 78AK111 to 78AK113.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effects and the specific effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A specific performance can be executed after the execution of the special performance is started, and the execution of the special performance may be restricted after the execution of the specific performance is started. Here, the execution of the special effect may be restricted, for example, when the battle zone effect is being executed at step 77AKS01.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation by means of the specific effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a start notification performance for notifying that the execution of the special performance is started, and when the predetermined advance notice performance is executed at the timing when the first period starts, it is given priority over the predetermined notice performance. , the start notification effect may be executed. Here, the start notification effect may be, for example, the message notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH22. The predetermined notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the execution of the special effect is to be started, thereby improving the interest in the game.

It may be possible to display special information regarding the progress of the game, and in the first period, display the special information in the same color as in periods other than the first period. Here, the special information display may be, for example, the information display of the first interface display area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of production execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while properly executing the special information display.

In the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, if the execution of the special effect is determined based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area, the execution of the special effect is executed after the stop display period ends. may be started. Here, the execution of the special effect is started after the end of the stop display period, for example, when the final stop pattern is being derived and displayed in step 77AKS04 and the color change effect start setting is performed in step 77AKS42. and so on.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

The special effects include a first special effect of changing to a first color and a second special effect of changing to a second color different from the first color, and either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Depending on the amount, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may differ. Here, the first special effect may be, for example, the case of monochrome change by color change effect. The second special effect may be, for example, the case of a golden color change by a color change effect.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation through the special effects and improve the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a first notice effect and a second notice effect using an image larger than the first notice effect, and in the first period, the first notice effect is changed in accordance with the special effect and the corresponding color. In the first period, the second notice effect may be executed in the same color as in periods other than the first period. Here, the first notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. The second notice effect may be, for example, a story notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. Execution can be performed with the changed color and the corresponding color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK214. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK215.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the advance notice effect and improve the game interest.

The special performance can be continuously executed until a specific timing during the execution of the target variable display, the special performance can be executed corresponding to the specific timing, and the execution of the special performance is restricted during the first period. You may Here, the specific timing may be, for example, timing T02 corresponding to reach establishment. The special effect may be, for example, an advance notice after establishment of reach. Execution of the special effect may be restricted when, for example, the color change effect is being performed in step 77AKS35.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When the special effect is executed, after reducing the number of colors of the image data to be displayed, image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied to change the color of the screen display. Here, the number of colors of the image data to be displayed may be reduced if, for example, monochrome conversion color blending is executed in step 79AKS03. The image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied, for example, when executing gold conversion color blending in step 79AKS06.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

Effect display may be performed with priority over display using image data to which image processing is applied. Here, the effect display may be, for example, an image display as an effect for gold in the display layer AKL0.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When a specific performance is executed in a second period overlapping with the first period, it may be possible to execute a parallel notification performance for reporting that the special performance is being executed in parallel with the specific performance. Here, the parallel notification effect may be, for example, the telop notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AK213 and 77AK223.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the execution of the special effect and the specific effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 79AK)
A game machine which performs variable display based on the passage of a game medium through a starting area and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player, wherein the predetermined period starts from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the starting area. a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect of changing a plurality of effect displays displayed during the predetermined period to a common color, wherein the special effect executing means changes to a first color as the special effect. and a second special effect of changing to a second color different from the first color. It further comprises change processing means capable of executing a common color change process when changing to two colors. Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The predetermined period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The first special effect may be, for example, a case of monochrome change by color change effect. The second special effect may be, for example, the case of a golden color change by a color change effect. The change processing means may be, for example, VDP77AK132 that executes steps 79AKS01 to 79AKS05.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while reducing the processing load of the effect of changing the color.

When the specified period overlaps with the specified period in a state in which the specified effect executing means capable of executing the specified effect suggesting the control to be in an advantageous state during the specified period, and the special effect and the specified effect are both executed. , the specific performance can be executed after the execution of the special performance is started, and the execution of the special performance may be restricted after the execution of the specific performance is started. Here, the specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The specific period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. Execution of the special effect may be restricted when, for example, the battle zone effect is being executed at step 77AKS01.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation by means of the specific effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a start notification performance for notifying that the execution of the special performance is started, and when the predetermined advance notice performance is executed at the timing when the predetermined period starts, it is given priority over the predetermined notice performance. A start notification effect may be executed. Here, the start notification effect may be, for example, the message notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH22. The predetermined notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the execution of the special effect is to be started, thereby improving the interest in the game.

It may be possible to execute special information display regarding the progress of the game, and during a predetermined period, display the special information in the same color as during periods other than the predetermined period. Here, the special information display may be, for example, the information display of the first interface display area AKA1 and the second interface display area AKA2. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of production execution examples 77AKH12 and 77AKH13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while properly executing the special information display.

In the stop display period in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, if the execution of the special effect is determined based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area, the execution of the special effect is executed after the stop display period ends. may be started. Here, the execution of the special effect is started after the end of the stop display period, for example, when the final stop pattern is being derived and displayed in step 77AKS04 and the color change effect start setting is performed in step 77AKS42. and so on.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

Depending on which one of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state may differ.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the sense of anticipation through the special effects and improve the amusement of the game.

It is possible to execute a first notice effect and a second notice effect using an image larger than the first notice effect, and the first notice effect is performed with a color changed according to the special effect and a corresponding color in a predetermined period. It may be executable, and during a predetermined period, the second announcement effect may be executable in a color common to periods other than the predetermined period. Here, the first notice effect may be, for example, a step-up notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. The second notice effect may be, for example, a story notice included in the notice during all symbol changes. Execution can be performed with the changed color and the corresponding color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK214. It is possible to execute with a common color, for example, in the case of effect execution example 77AK215.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the advance notice effect and improve the game interest.

The special performance can be continuously executed until a specific timing during the execution of the target variable display, the special performance can be executed corresponding to the specific timing, and the execution of the special performance is restricted during a predetermined period. may Here, the specific timing may be, for example, timing T02 corresponding to reach establishment. The special effect may be, for example, an advance notice after establishment of reach. Execution of the special effect may be restricted when, for example, the color change effect is being performed in step 77AKS35.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When executing a special effect, after reducing the number of colors of image data to be displayed, image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied to change a plurality of effect displays to a common color. . Here, the number of colors of the image data to be displayed may be reduced if, for example, monochrome conversion color blending is executed in step 79AKS03. The image processing corresponding to the special color may be applied, for example, when executing gold conversion color blending in step 79AKS06.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

Effect display may be performed with priority over display using image data to which image processing is applied. Here, the effect display may be, for example, an image display as an effect for gold in the display layer AKL0.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and improve the game interest.

When the specified period overlaps with the specified period in a state in which the specified effect executing means capable of executing the specified effect suggesting the control to be in an advantageous state during the specified period, and the special effect and the specified effect are both executed. and when a specific performance is executed in a specific period overlapping with a predetermined period, it may be possible to execute a parallel notification performance for notifying that the special performance is being executed in parallel with the specific performance. Here, the parallel notification effect may be, for example, the telop notification effect in the effect execution examples 77AK213 and 77AK223.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the execution of the special effect and the specific effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 05AK)
Regarding the characteristic part 05AK, at least during the variable display of the decoration pattern, the screen display related to the variable display is rocked as a specific area in which a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time are displayed. It is possible to perform a production. The swing performance is included in the advance notice performance executable by the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is only necessary that the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is different between when the swing performance is executed and when it is not executed. For example, when the swing performance is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" and the ratio of control to the big win game state should be higher than when the swing performance is not executed. The swing performance is not limited to the time when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and may be performed continuously even when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The swing effect may be continuously executable over a plurality of variable displays.

FIG. 11-1 shows a case where the swing effect is executed when the color change effect is not executed as a first execution example of the swing effect regarding the characteristic portion 05AK. When the color change performance is not executed, the screen display of the image display device 5 is displayed in the normal display color which is the normal color regardless of whether the swing performance is executed or not. . The normal display color may be specified by a pixel value such as an RGB value, which is the pixel value of each pixel, in the image data representing the effect image.

FIG. 11-1(A) shows a screen in which a plurality of effect images are displayed at the same time on the screen of the image display device 5 before the swing effect is executed in a period in which the color change effect is not executed. This shows an example 05AK01 of effect execution by display. In the effect execution example 05AK01, a plurality of effect displays on the screen displayed at the same time are displayed in normal colors corresponding to the normal time when the color change effect is not executed. In the active display portion AKB0, a display image AKE0 for white display is displayed. In the first pending display part AKB1, the pending display associated with the pending numbers "1" and "2" is performed corresponding to the first pending storage number "2". A display image AKE1 in blue display is displayed as a hold display associated with the hold number "1", and a display image AKE0 in white display is displayed as a hold display associated with the hold number "2". there is

FIG. 11-1(B) shows an effect execution example 05AK02 by screen display in which a effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during execution of the swing effect, following the effect execution example 05AK01. there is When the swing effect is executed, the screen display of the image display device 5 includes the display of the effect image in the specific area that was displayed before the execution of the swing effect, background display 05AKG1 during swinging, and shaking effect. It includes a dynamic outer frame display 05AKG2 and an effect display 05AKG3.

The rocking background display 05AKG1 is a display in a special area outside the screen display, which is the display displayed in the rocking specific area, and is a background image using a base color for the rocking background, such as blue. It is sufficient if the effect image is displayed as follows. The rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 is a display in the peripheral area of the edge of the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be rocked. It is sufficient to display a performance image that is an outer frame image. The effect display 05AKG03 includes a screen display, which is a display displayed in a specific area that is caused to oscillate by a sway effect at a specific position included in the screen display, for example, the upper part of the screen display in the image display device 5, and a background at the time of swaying. At least one of the display 05AKG1 and the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 can be displayed in a display mode that straddles, for example, an effect image using a basic color for rocking effects, such as a rainbow color. It is sufficient if the display of the effect image is different.

The screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swaying effect, includes the normal background display, the display of the decorative pattern during the variable display, the display in the advance notice effect, and the second interface display area. Suspension display in the first suspension display portion AKB1 and the second suspension display portion AKB2 in the display area AKA2 corresponding to the variable display is included. The screen display to be rocked by the rocking effect may be reduced by a predetermined magnification compared to the screen display that was displayed before the rocking effect was executed. By reducing the screen display and executing the swing effect, the player can easily view the background display 05AKG1 during swing and the outer frame display 05AKG2 during swing.

The screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swaying effect, corresponds to the display of small symbols in the small symbol display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area and the variable display which is the second interface display area. The active display in the active display portion AKB0 of the display area AKA2 is not included. For example, when the display of the small symbols is oscillated, it becomes difficult for the player to visually confirm whether or not the variable display is being performed, and there is a possibility that the distrust of the game increases. When the active display is swayed, it may be difficult for the player to visually confirm the notice effect that the display mode of the active display changes, and it may be difficult to appropriately raise the expectation for the game. . Therefore, by not swinging the display of the small symbols and the active display, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the display containing important information about the variable display. It is possible to appropriately raise the expectations of the player.

FIG. 11-2 shows a case where the swing effect is executed when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed as a second execution example of the swing effect relating to the characteristic portion 05AK. When the swing effect is executed while the monochrome change is being executed in the color change effect, the screen display of the image display device 5 is displayed in a grayscale display color as a special color and in a normal color. and a region displayed in the normal display color.

FIG. 11-2(A) shows that a plurality of effect images are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 at the same time before the swing effect is executed while the monochrome change is being executed in the color change effect. 05AK11 shows an effect execution example 05AK11 by screen display. In the effect execution example 05AK11, a plurality of effect displays on the screen display displayed at the same time are displayed in a grayscale display color, which is a common special color, corresponding to the monochrome change in the color change effect. In the effect execution example 05AK11, in the case of the monochrome change, the display of the small patterns in the small pattern display area AKA1 serving as the first interface display area is maintained without changing the normal colors. In addition, in the effect execution example 05AK11, in the case of monochrome change, the active display in the active display portion AKB0 of the display area AKA2 corresponding to the variable display, which is the second interface display area, is maintained without changing the normal color. there is On the other hand, in the effect execution example 05AK11, in the case of the monochrome change, special The color is changed to a grayscale display color.

FIG. 11-2(B) shows an effect execution example 05AK12 by screen display in which a effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during execution of the swing effect, following the effect execution example 05AK11. there is In effect execution example 05AK12, similarly to effect execution example 05AK02, the screen display of image display device 5 includes rocking background display 05AKG1, rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, and effect display 05AKG3.

In the case of effect execution example 05AK12, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swing effect, is displayed in a grayscale display color that is a special color in the color change effect. On the other hand, in the effect execution example 05AK12, the background display 05AKG1 during rocking, the outer frame display 05AKG2 during rocking, and the effect display 05AKG3 all maintain their normal colors without changing. For example, the rocking background display 05AKG1 maintains the base color for the rocking background such as blue, the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 maintains the base color for the rocking outer frame such as silver, and the effect display 05AKG3 The base colors for swing effects, such as rainbow colors, are maintained.

In this way, when both the monochrome change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swing effect, is displayed in the special color, and the special area is displayed. The rocking background display 05AKG1, which is the display displayed in , is displayed in normal colors. Further, when both the monochrome change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swing effect, is displayed in a special color and displayed in the peripheral area. The rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, which is the displayed display, is displayed in normal colors. The effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in normal colors when both the monochrome change and the swinging performance in the color change performance are executed.

When the background display 05AKG1 during rocking and the outer frame display 05AKG2 during rocking are displayed in gray scale display colors as special colors when both the color change effect such as monochrome change and the swing effect are executed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the swing effect that swings the screen display, and the impression of the swing effect may be lowered. On the other hand, when both the color change effect such as monochrome change and the swing effect are executed, and the screen display to be swayed by the swing effect is returned to the normal color, the color change effect is performed. The player is given the impression that the color change effect is completed before the completion of the color change effect, and the player may misunderstand the content of the effect.

Therefore, when both the monochrome change in the color change effect and the swing effect are executed, the background display 05AKG1 during swing and the outer frame display 05AKG2 during swing are displayed in normal colors so that the player can enjoy the swing effect. becomes easy to visually recognize, and it is possible to appropriately execute the swing performance that prevents the impression from being lowered. In addition, when both the monochrome change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swing effect, is displayed in a special color, so that the color change can be achieved. It becomes easy for the player to visually recognize that the performance is not finished, and the color change performance can be properly executed while preventing misrecognition of the player. In this way, it is possible to appropriately execute the color change effect and the swing effect, thereby improving the game interest.

FIG. 11-3 shows a case where the swing effect is executed when the golden color change in the color change effect is executed as a third execution example of the swing effect relating to the characteristic portion 05AK. When the rocking effect is executed while the golden color change in the color change effect is being executed, the screen display of the image display device 5 is changed into a region displayed in a special gold display color and a normal display color. A region that is displayed in a normal display color, which becomes a color, is included.

In FIG. 11-3(A), during the period when the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, a plurality of effect images are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 at the same time before the swing effect is executed. Shows an effect execution example 05AK21 by screen display. In the effect execution example 05AK21, a plurality of effect displays on the screen displayed at the same time are displayed in a gold-like display color, which is a common special color, corresponding to the gold-based change in the color change effect. In the effect execution example 05AK21, in the case of a golden change, not only the suspended display in the first suspended display portion AKB1 and the second suspended display portion AKB2 of the variable display corresponding display area AKA2 serving as the second interface display area, but also the first The display of small patterns in the small pattern display area AKA1 that is the interface display area and the active display in the active display portion AKB0 of the display area AKA2 that corresponds to the variable display that is the second interface display area are also displayed in gold as a special color. changing in color.

FIG. 11-3(B) shows an effect execution example 05AK22 by screen display in which a effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during execution of the swing effect, following the effect execution example 05AK21. there is In effect execution example 05AK22 as well, the screen display of image display device 5 includes rocking background display 05AKG1, rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, and effect display 05AKG3.

In the case of effect execution example 05AK22, the screen display, which is the specific area to be swayed by the swing effect, is displayed in a golden display color, which is a special color in the color change effect. On the other hand, in the effect execution example 05AK22, both the rocking background display 05AKG1 and the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 are maintained without changing their normal colors. For example, the rocking background display 05AKG1 maintains the base color for the rocking background such as blue, and the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 maintains the base color for the rocking outer frame such as silver.

In this way, when both the golden color change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swing effect, is displayed in a special color. The rocking background display 05AKG1, which is the display displayed in the region, is displayed in normal colors. In addition, when both the golden color change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swing effect, is displayed in a special color, and is displayed in the peripheral area. The outer frame display 05AKG2 during rocking, which is the displayed display, is displayed in normal colors.

When both the color change performance such as the gold color change and the swing performance are executed, the background display 05AKG1 at the time of rocking and the outer frame display 05AKG2 at the time of rocking are displayed in a special golden display color. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the swing effect that swings the screen display, and the impression of the swing effect may be lowered. On the other hand, when both the color change effect such as the gold color change and the swing effect are executed, if the screen display to be shaken by the swing effect is returned to the normal color, the color change There is a risk that the player will be given the impression that the color change effect is finished before the effect is finished, and the player will misunderstand the content of the effect.

Therefore, when both the golden color change and the swinging effect in the color change effect are executed, the swinging effect is played by displaying the swinging background display 05AKG1 and the swinging outer frame display 05AKG2 in normal colors. It becomes easy for a person to visually recognize, and it is possible to appropriately execute a swing performance that prevents a decrease in the degree of impression. In addition, when both the golden color change and the swing effect in the color change effect are executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swing effect, is displayed in a special color. It becomes easy for the player to visually recognize that the change performance is not finished, and the color change performance can be properly executed while preventing misrecognition by the player. In this way, it is possible to appropriately execute the color change effect and the swing effect, thereby improving the game interest.

In the effect execution example 05AK22, the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in a golden display color, which is a special color in the color change effect. In this way, when both the golden color change and the swinging effect in the color change effect are executed, the effect display 05AKG3 may be displayed in a special color. When the gold-colored change in the color change performance is executed, it is determined that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, which is a performance mode in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is high. In accordance with this, by displaying the effect display 05AKG3 in a special color, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of expectation and improve the game interest. It should be noted that the effect display 05AKG3 may be displayed in normal colors when both the golden color change and the swinging effect in the color change effect are executed. Whether the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in normal colors or in special colors may be determined at a predetermined ratio. Depending on whether the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in a special color or in a normal color, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state may be made different. For example, when the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in a special color, even if the variable display result is "big hit" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when the effect display 05AKG3 is displayed in the normal color. good.

FIG. 11-4 shows an execution example in the case where the suspension display and the active display are performed while the monochrome change in the color change effect is being performed with respect to the characteristic portion 05AK. In the characteristic portion 05AK, in the case of a monochrome change, the suspended display in the first suspended display portion AKB1 and the second suspended display portion AKB2 in the variable display compatible display area AKA2 serving as the second interface display area is a gray scale with a special color. is displayed in the display color of . On the other hand, the active display in the active display portion AKB0 of the variable display compatible display area AKA2 serving as the second interface display area is displayed in the normal display color. Here, the normal display colors are a plurality of display colors such as white, blue, green, red, and gold corresponding to the display images AKE0 to AKE4 shown in FIGS. Any display color may be used as long as it includes color and is different from the grayscale display color corresponding to the monochrome change in the color change effect.

In the first pending display section AKB1 and the second pending display section AKB2, pending display such as the first pending display and the second pending display according to the contents stored in the pending display data storage section AKM1 are performed in correspondence with the pending storage. . The pending storage may contain storage of pending information indicating a random number value extracted when a starting prize is won. In the active display section AKB0, an active display is performed as a specific display corresponding to the variable display being executed. When a variable presentation is initiated, active presentations can be performed in a manner associated with the pending presentation corresponding to the variable presentation. For example, when the first special game is started, in the first reservation display part AKB1, the reservation display associated with the reservation number "1" is erased (digested), and the erased reservation display is enlarged. The active display is started in the active display section AKB0. Further, when the second special game is started, in the second reservation display part AKB2, the reservation display associated with the reservation number "1" is erased (digested), and the erased reservation display is displayed. An enlarged active display is started in the active display portion AKB0. As described above, in the active display portion AKB0, active displays having a larger display size than the reserved display such as the first reserved display of the first reserved display portion AKB1 and the second reserved display of the second reserved display portion AKB2 are performed. may An animation display associated with the pending display may be performed along with the start of the active display. In addition, the active display may be displayed in any display mode related to the hold display.

In the characteristic portion 05AK, the suspended display is displayed in a grayscale display color as a special color during the period in which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, so the player cannot recognize the normal display color. become difficult. On the other hand, in the characteristic portion 05AK, the active display is displayed in the normal display color, which is the normal color, during the period in which the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed. It becomes easier for the player to recognize the colors.

In the effect execution example 05AK31 shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the active display and the two first pending displays are performed when the variable display of decorative symbols is completed. At this time, even if the display color of the first pending display corresponding to the pending number “1” is gold corresponding to the display image AKE4 in the normal state, the monochrome change in the color change effect is performed, so the special It is displayed in a grayscale display color, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the gold display color. After that, in the effect execution example 05AK32 shown in FIG. 11-4(B), when a new variable display is started, the first pending display with the pending number "1" is erased, and the corresponding display image AKE4 is displayed. Active display using is started. At this time, the active display is displayed in the normal display color, which is the normal color, even if the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed, and the player recognizes the gold display color corresponding to the display image AKE4. becomes easier.

When a color change effect such as a monochrome change is being executed, the suspension display in the first suspension display part AKB1 or the second suspension display part AKB2 is displayed in normal colors similar to when the color change effect is not being performed. In this case, there is a possibility that the number of color-changing representations that change colors by the color-changing representation decreases, and the degree of impression of the color-changing representation decreases. On the other hand, when the active display in the active display section AKB0 is displayed in a special color different from the normal color when a color change effect such as a monochrome change is being executed, the display mode of the active display changes. It may be difficult for the player to visually confirm the advance notice effect, etc., and it may be difficult to appropriately heighten the sense of expectation for the game. Therefore, when a color change effect such as a monochrome change is executed, the suspension display in the first suspension display section AKB1 and the second suspension display section AKB2 is displayed in a special color, and the active display in the active display section AKB0 is displayed in a normal color. Display by As a result, the sense of unity in the color change effect is enhanced to prevent a decrease in the degree of impression, and the player's expectation is heightened by making it easier for the player to visually recognize the display containing important information regarding the variable display. In addition, it is possible to appropriately execute the pending display and the active display to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that when a color change effect such as a monochrome change is being executed, the active display is made different whether to display in a special color or in a normal color depending on whether the expectation of a big win is low or high. good too. For example, active display using any one of the display images AKE0 to AKE2 among the display images AKE0 to AKE4, when the expectation of a big hit is low, is performed when a color change effect such as a monochrome change is performed. may be displayed in a grayscale display color as a special color. On the other hand, the active display using either the display images AKE3 or AKE4 out of the display images AKE0 to AKE4 when the expectation of a big hit is high, performs a color change effect such as a monochrome change. may be displayed in the usual colors red or gold when As a result, the sense of unity in the color change effect is enhanced to prevent a decrease in the degree of impression, and the active display, which has a high expectation of a big hit, is made easier for the player to visually recognize, so that the player's expectation is heightened. can be executed appropriately to improve the game interest.

FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 show an execution example of an effect by making the game effect lamp 9 emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N. Here, a plurality of production execution examples 05AK51 to 05AK56 are shown according to the execution mode of the production by light emission.

Effect execution example 05AK51 shows a case where the step-up notice is executed during a period in which the color change effect and the swing effect are not executed. In effect execution example 05AK51, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit red light in accordance with the display color of the outer frame partial image in the step-up notice. In this way, in a period in which the color change effect or the swinging effect is not executed, when the advance notice effect such as the step-up notice is executed, the game is played with the light emission color that matches the effect mode of part or all of the notice effect. It suffices if part or all of the effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light.

Effect execution example 05AK52 shows a case where both the swing effect and the step-up notice are executed during a period in which the color change effect is not executed. In the effect execution example 05AK52, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit blue light in accordance with the base color of the rocking background display 05AKG1 in the rocking effect. In this way, in the period when the color change effect is not executed, when the notice effect such as the swing effect and the step-up notice is executed, the light emission color is adjusted to the effect mode of part or all of the swing effect. It suffices if part or all of the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light.

Effect execution example 05AK53 shows a case where both the monochrome change and the step-up notice in the color change effect are executed during the period in which the swing effect is not executed. In the effect execution example 05AK53, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit silver light in accordance with the monochrome change in the color change effect. In this way, during the period in which both the monochrome change in the color change effect and the advance notice effect such as the step-up notice are being executed, if the swing effect is not being executed, in accordance with the effect mode of the monochrome change in the color change effect It suffices if a part or all of the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light with the light emission color.

Effect execution example 05AK54 shows a case where the monochrome change, the swing effect, and the step-up notice in the color change effect are executed together. In the effect execution example 05AK54, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit blue light in accordance with the base color of the rocking background display 05AKG1 in the rocking effect. In this way, during the period in which the monochrome change, the swing effect, and the step-up notice in the color change effect are executed together, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a color that matches part or all of the effect mode in the swing effect. A part or all of them can be made to emit light.

Effect execution example 05AK55 shows a case where both the golden change in the color change effect and the step-up notice are executed during the period in which the swing effect is not executed. In the effect execution example 05AK55, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in gold according to the gold color change in the color change effect. In this way, during the period in which both the golden change in the color change effect and the advance notice effect such as the step-up notice are being executed, the effect mode of the golden change in the color change effect is not executed when the swing effect is not being executed. A part or all of the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a color matching the color of the light.

Effect execution example 05AK56 shows a case where the golden color change, the swing effect, and the step-up notice in the color change effect are executed together. In the effect execution example 05AK56, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in gold according to the gold color change in the color change effect. In this way, during the period in which the golden color change in the color change effect, the swing effect, and the advance notice effect such as the step-up notice are all executed, the color All or part of the game effect lamps 9 may be caused to emit light in a color matching the effect mode of the gold color change in the change effect.

FIG. 11-6(C) shows a setting example 05AKY1 of the light emission priority for the case where the effect by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. The light emission priority is used to determine the light emission mode such as the light emission color of the game effect lamp 9 during a period in which a plurality of effects are executed simultaneously. In a period in which a plurality of effects are executed together, the light emission mode including the light emission color of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in accordance with the effect with a high light emission priority rather than the effect with a low light emission priority.

As shown in the production execution examples 05AK51 to 05AK56, the luminescence priority is highest for the gold color change in the color change production, and lowers as the swing production and the monochrome change occur in the color change production, and step-up notice etc. Other notice effects are the lowest. Therefore, as shown in the production execution examples 05AK53 and 05AK55, when the monochrome change or golden color change in the color change production and the notice production such as the step-up notice are executed together, the game effect lamp 9 is changed in color. Light is emitted in a luminescent color such as silver or gold corresponding to the production. As a result, it is possible to improve the sense of unity of the color change presentation and prevent the impression from being lowered. Further, as shown in the effect execution example 05AK54, when both the monochrome change in the color change effect and the swing effect are executed, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a luminescent color such as blue corresponding to the swing effect. light up. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the swing performance, and it is possible to prevent the impression of the swing performance from being lowered. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by the appropriate emission color of the game effect lamp 9 which prevents the impression degree of the color change effect and the swing effect from being lowered.

When the gold-colored change in the color change performance is executed, it is determined that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, which is a performance mode in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is high. Therefore, as shown in the effect execution example 05AK56, when both the golden color change in the color change effect and the swing effect are executed, the game effect lamp 9 is set to the gold color corresponding to the gold color change in the color change effect. It emits light with a luminescent color such as In this way, when both the color change effect with a high expectation for a big hit, such as a golden color change in the color change effect, and the rocking effect are executed together, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in the emission color corresponding to the color change effect. You may let As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by the appropriate emission color of the game effect lamp 9 that enhances the player's sense of anticipation. Incidentally, when both the golden color change in the color change effect and the swing effect are executed, the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a luminescent color such as blue corresponding to the swing effect. In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the swing performance, and the game effect can be improved by the appropriate emission color of the game effect lamp 9 that prevents the impression of the swing performance from being lowered.

The emission priority of the game effect lamps 9 may be set differently when the effect modes of the plurality of effects executed simultaneously are different. For example, when the number of steps in the step-up notice is "2" or less, the light emission priority is lower than in the case of monochrome change in the color change effect. On the other hand, when the number of steps in the step-up notice is "3" or more, the light emission priority may be higher than in the case of the monochrome change in the color change effect. When the arbitrary production mode in the swing production is different, the light emission priority is lower than in the case of monochrome change in the color change production, and the light emission priority is higher than in the case of golden color change in the color change production. It may include cases where

FIG. 11-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step AKS013 of FIG. 10-11 as the advance notice effect determination processing. In the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-7, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 10-13, the advance notice during all symbol changes is decided (steps 77AKS31 to 77AKS33). Subsequently, unlike the case shown in FIGS. 10-13, the presence or absence of the swing effect and the pattern are determined (step 05AKS01). The swing performance pattern is also called a swing performance pattern. At step 05AKS01, one of "no effect" in which the swinging effect is not executed and "with effect" in which the swinging effect is executed is determined. Then, when it is determined that "with effect" for executing the swing effect, one of a plurality of swing effect patterns prepared in advance is determined. After that, similarly to the case shown in FIGS. 10-13, the advance notice after establishment of reach is determined (steps 77AKS34 to 77AKS39).

FIG. 11-8(A) shows a setting example 05AKP1 of the swing effect pattern. In setting example 05AKP1, as a plurality of swinging performance patterns, there are swinging performance patterns 05PA01 to 05PA04, 05PA11 to 05PA14 in which some or all of a plurality of types of performance modes, such as a rocking period, a number of rocking motions, and an effect display, are different. is prepared in advance. The swing period designates the effect period during which the swing effect is executed. The number of times of shaking designates the number of times the screen display is shaken by the shaking effect. The effect display specifies the display color of the effect display 05AKG3 for effect during swing. In addition, a plurality of swing effect patterns may be prepared that are different in arbitrary effect modes such as swing angle, screen display size, swing direction, and swing speed.

In the swing production pattern 05PA01, the swing period is 3 seconds, the number of swings is 3, and the effect display is a rainbow-colored production mode. In the swing production pattern 05PA02, the swing period is 3 seconds, the number of swings is 5, and the effect display is a rainbow-colored production mode. In the swing production pattern 05PA03, the swing period is 5 seconds, the number of swings is 3, and the effect display is a rainbow-colored production mode. In the swing production pattern 05PA04, the swing period is 5 seconds, the number of swings is 5, and the effect display is a rainbow-colored production mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA11, the swing period is 3 seconds, the number of times of swing is 3, and the effect display is a gold effect mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA12, the swing period is 3 seconds, the number of times of swing is 5, and the effect display is in a golden effect mode. In the swing effect pattern 05PA13, the swing period is 5 seconds, the number of times of swing is 3, and the effect display is a golden effect mode. In the swing production pattern 05PA14, the swing period is 5 seconds, the number of swings is 5, and the effect display is in a golden production mode.

FIG. 11-8(B) shows a determination example 05AKD1 in the case of determining whether or not to perform the swing effect. In step 05AKS01, for example, by using a random value for determining the swing performance, a swing performance determination table is referred to, and a determination result to which a determination value matching the random value is assigned is determined according to the variable display result. Thus, whether or not to execute the swing performance, that is, whether or not to perform the swing performance may be determined. In decision example 05AKD1, when the variable display result is "big win", it is determined to be "with effect" in which the swing effect is executed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is "losing". By such setting, when the swing performance is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when the swing performance is not executed.

FIG. 11-8(C) shows a determination example 05AKD2 of the swing effect pattern. In step 05AKS01, when it is determined that "with effect" to execute the swing effect, for example, a random value for determining the swing effect pattern is used to refer to the swing effect pattern determination table, and color change effect or variable effect is performed. The swing performance pattern may be determined by determining the determination result to which the determination value matching the random number value is assigned according to the display result. In decision example 05AKD2, in the case of "none" that the color change effect is not executed, or in the case of executing the monochrome change in the color change effect, one of the swing effect patterns 05AP01 to 05AP04 is determined. All of the swing production patterns 05AP01 to 05AP04 include a production mode in which the effect display is rainbow colored. Therefore, the display color of the effect display 05AKG3 becomes rainbow when the swinging effect is executed during the period in which the color change effect is not executed or the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed. In the determination example 05AKD2, any one of the swing effect patterns 05AP11 to 05AP14 is determined when executing a golden change in the color change effect. All of the swing production patterns 05AP11 to 05AP14 include a production mode in which the effect display is gold. Therefore, when the swing effect is executed during the period in which the golden color change in the color change effect is executed, the display color of the effect display 05AKG3 becomes gold.

A swing performance pattern may be determined so that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to an arbitrary performance mode in the swing performance. For example, the background display 05AKG1 during rocking, the outer frame display 05AKG2 during rocking, the effect display 05AKG3, and any other arbitrary effect images displayed when the rocking effect is executed have a shape that is partly or wholly shown, The decision rate of the swing effect pattern may be set so that the variable display result is "big hit" and the rate of control to the big win game state is different when either the color or the pattern is different.

Depending on whether the color change effect is executed or not executed, or whether the color change effect being executed is a monochrome change or a gold color change, part of the effect mode in the swing effect or It may be possible to determine swing effect patterns so that they are all different. The performance mode in the swinging performance becomes common between when the color change performance is executed and when it is not executed, and when the color change performance being executed is a monochrome change and a golden color change. The swing effect pattern may be determined so that there are cases where part or all of the effect mode in the swing effect is different. The performance mode in the swinging performance becomes common between when the color change performance is executed and when it is not executed, and when the color change performance being executed is a monochrome change and a golden color change. The decision rate of the swing effect pattern may be set such that the rates are different. The performance mode in the swinging performance becomes common between when the color change performance is executed and when it is not executed, and when the color change performance being executed is a monochrome change and a golden color change. The determination rate of the swing performance pattern may be set such that the degree of expectation for the big hit of the swing performance pattern is different.

After such a swing effect pattern is determined, the effect process during variable display is executed in step S172 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, whereby the swing effect can be executed. In the effect processing during variable display, for example, when it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not it is the swing effect period. The swing performance period may be set according to the swing performance pattern. Then, in the case of the swing performance period, control for executing the swing performance is performed. At this time, the CPU 77AK 131 performs display control for executing the swing effect by the drawing command supplied to the VDP 77AK 132 . In this way, it is sufficient that the swing effect can be executed during the period in which the variable display is executed. Note that, when the swinging effect is executed over a plurality of times of variable display, display control may be performed so that the swinging effect is continuously executed even after the variable display ends.

FIG. 11-9 shows an example of control of the timing of starting and ending execution of the color change effect and the swing effect. The swing performance can be started at the timing corresponding to the start of variation when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. After that, the execution of the swing performance ends at the timing when the performance time corresponding to the swing period of the swing performance pattern has passed. It should be noted that the timing for starting the execution of the swing effect is not limited to the timing corresponding to the start of the fluctuation, and may be any timing set in advance during the period in which the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 11-9(A) shows a control example 05AKC01 in the case where the swing effect is executed while the color change effect is being executed. In the control example 05AKC01, the execution of the swinging effect is started when the variable display as the target variation of the color change effect is started. Then, if the swing period of the swing performance pattern is 3 seconds, the swing performance is executed in the performance period TD1. If the swing period of the swing performance pattern is 5 seconds, the swing performance is executed in the performance period TD2. Both of the effect periods TD1 and TD2 are set so as to end at a timing prior to establishment of the ready-to-win state. The execution of the color change effect is completed at timing T02 provided after establishment of the ready-to-win state in which the variable display of the ornamental pattern becomes the ready-to-win state in the variable display to change the target. Therefore, since the color change effect is not finished during the period in which the swing effect is executed, the screen display, which is the display displayed in the specific area to be swayed by the swing effect, is not returned from the special color to the normal color. . The color change performance should be restricted as a limit such that the period during which the swing performance is executed is determined, and the special color is not returned to the normal color without ending within this range. Thus, when both the color change effect and the swing effect are executed, the screen display, which is the specific area, is not returned from the special color to the normal color during the execution of the swing effect. To improve amusement in a game by appropriately executing the color change performance and the swing performance so as to prevent the combination of the color change performance and the swing performance from giving a complicated impression to the player. can be done.

It should be noted that when both the color change effect and the swing effect are executed, there may be a case where the screen display, which is the specific area, is returned from the special color to the normal color during the execution of the swing effect. For example, the effect period of the swinging effect can be set so that the variable display of the decorative pattern continues until after the ready-to-win state in which the ready-to-win state is established. There may be a case where the moving effect is continuously executed. In this case, the screen display, which is the specific area, is returned from the special color to the normal color during execution of the swing effect. As a result, the color change effect and the swing effect are appropriately executed so as to enhance the impression of the swing effect, thereby improving the game interest.

The swing effect may be included in a specific effect that is executed after the reach is established, such as the reach effect of super reach. In this case, the timing T02 at which the execution of the color change effect ends may be set to be after the ready-to-win state is established and after the execution of the specific effect ends. With this setting, the color change effect does not end during the period in which the swing effect is being executed. Limits can be placed to prevent color reversion.

FIG. 11-9(B) shows a control example 05AKC02 when execution of the color change effect is started while the swing effect is being executed. In the control example 05AKC02, when the variable display is started during the period in which the color change effect is not executed, the swing effect is started to be executed. Then, if the swing period of the swing performance pattern is 3 seconds, the swing performance is executed in the performance period TD1. If the swing period of the swing performance pattern is 5 seconds, the swing performance is executed in the performance period TD2. Execution of the color change effect can be started at the timing when the game ball passes through the starting area provided in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening as the occurrence of the starting winning opening. When such timing T01 is included in the performance periods TD1 and TD2, the execution of the color change performance is started during the execution of the swing performance, and the display displayed in the specific area to be swung by the swing performance. is changed from normal color to special color. In this way, when the swinging effect is being executed, it is possible to execute the color change effect so as to change the screen display from the normal color to the special color. As a result, the color change performance and the swing performance are appropriately executed so as to secure the opportunity to execute the color change performance based on the starting prize and prevent the frequency of execution of the color change performance from decreasing. , can improve the game interest.

FIGS. 11-10 show configuration examples of effect displays including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the swing effect is executed. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn, for example, divided into a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 11-10, layers 05FL0 to 05FL3 are provided as a plurality of display layers. A drawing area corresponding to each display layer may be secured in a frame buffer such as VRAM77AK145. A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by display priority information or the like included in the display list, for example. In the display list, the effect image placed on layer 05FL3 is specified as the first drawing target. After that, the effect images arranged in each display layer may be designated as drawing targets in the order of layers 05FL2, 05FL1, and 05FL0. Also, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on the layers 05FL0 to 05FL3 may be set with a Z value, which is the depth value used when superimposing and drawing the respective effect images.

The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL2 is included in the effect images forming the decorative design related screen. For example, the layer 05FL2 includes an effect image showing decorative patterns, an effect image that is a background image used for normal background display, an effect image that is used for advance notice effect such as step-up notice, and a variable display that is the second interface display area. Effect images used for suspension display in the first suspension display portion AKB1 and the second suspension display portion AKB2 of the corresponding display area AKA2 are drawn so as to be displayable. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL2 is displayed in a special color different from the normal color by changing the display color to a gray scale when the monochrome change in the color change effect is executed. In this case, by executing the color change synthesis processing shown in FIGS. 10-20, the color overlay for color change may be changed to a grayscale color different from the normal color. In this way, the layer 05FL2 is included in the monochrome change target for changing the color of the effect image designated as the drawing object to a color different from the normal color when the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect.

The screen display to be rocked by the rocking effect may be updated before the rocking effect is executed, and may be statically displayed during the rocking effect. In this case, the drawing of the performance image on the layer 05FL2 is temporarily stopped during the period in which the swing performance is executed, and the performance image drawn when the swing performance is started is captured and fetched. , the effect image may be kept still so as not to be updated within the screen display to be oscillated.

Alternatively, the screen display to be rocked by the rocking effect may be updated and displayed even during execution of the rocking effect. In this case, the rendering of the performance image in the layer 05FL2 is continuously executed while the swing performance is being executed, and the performance image can be updated to a performance image different from when the swing performance is started. Thus, the effect image may be continuously updated within the swinging screen display.

The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL1 is included in the effect images forming the outer frame of the screen. For example, the layer 05FL1 is drawn so that an effect image used for the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2 can be displayed. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL1 is synthesized with the effect image drawn on the layer 05FL2 to form the screen display and the peripheral area of the edge that are swayed by the swing effect. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL1 is displayed in the peripheral area of the edge of the swinging screen display. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL1, such as the effect image used for the rocking outer frame display 05AKG2, may not be displayed during the period when the rocking effect is not being executed. It may be displayed at a predetermined position such as a peripheral portion on the screen. By executing the swing display control according to the swing performance pattern, it is possible to execute the swing performance with different performance modes.

The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL3 is included in the effect images forming the rocking background. For example, the layer 05FL3 is drawn so that the effect image used for the rocking background display 05AKG1 can be displayed. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL3 is displayed in a special area outside the screen display to be oscillated, unlike the effect images that constitute the screen display to be oscillated by the oscillating effect. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL3, such as the effect image used for the rocking background display 05AKG1, may not be displayed while the rocking effect is not being executed.

The layer 05FL0 is used for effect images showing small symbols in the small symbol display area AKA1 which is the first interface display area, and active display in the active display portion AKB0 of the variable display compatible display area AKA2 which is the second interface display area. An effect image, an effect image used for the effect display 05AKG3, and the like are drawn so as to be displayable. The effect image drawn on the layer 05FL0 is different from the effect image that constitutes the screen display to be rocked by the rocking effect, and is the effect used for the effect display 05AKG3 that straddles the screen display to be rocked and the special area or the peripheral area. Contains images.

A display image 05LX1 including effect images corresponding to a plurality of effect displays is generated by executing a process of drawing effect images corresponding to a plurality of display layers. Note that the effect image used for active display may be drawn on a separate layer having a higher display priority than the layer 05FL0. Alternatively, the effect image used for the active display may be drawn in different display layers depending on whether the degree of expectation for a big win is low or high. For example, among the display images AKE0 to AKE4, the effect image used for active display when the expectation of a big hit is low, such as active display using any of the display images AKE0 to AKE2, has the same display priority as layer 05FL2. It may be rendered in a layer with a color change overlay and the color may be changed. On the other hand, among the display images AKE0 to AKE4, the effect image used for active display when the expectation of a big hit is high, such as active display using any one of the display images AKE3 and AKE4, has the same display priority as the layer 05FL0. It may be drawn in a layer having a higher display priority than the layer 05FL0, and control may be performed so that the color does not change when the color change effect is executed.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 05AK)
A game machine which performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player, and can execute a special performance of changing a plurality of performance displays displayed at the same time from normal colors to common special colors. A special performance execution means and a swing performance execution means capable of executing a swing performance for swinging a specific area displaying a plurality of performance displays displayed at the same time are provided, and in the swing performance, When the special area outside the specific area to be oscillated becomes visible and both the special effect and the oscillating effect are executed, the display displayed in the specific area is displayed in a special color, and the special area is displayed. The display is usually displayed in color. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The swing effect execution means may be the CPU 77AK131 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 based on step 05AKS01, for example. The special area may be, for example, the rocking background display 05AKG1. Displaying the special area in the normal color may be, for example, effect execution examples 05AK12 and 05AK22.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and the swing effect, thereby improving the game interest.

Alternatively, a game machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, executes a special effect that changes a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time from normal colors to common special colors. and a swing performance execution means capable of executing a swing performance for swinging a specific area where a plurality of performance displays displayed at the same time are displayed, wherein the swing performance is performed. , when the peripheral area of the edge of the specific area to be rocked becomes visible, and when both the special effect and the rocking effect are performed, the display displayed in the specific area is displayed in a special color, and the peripheral area is The displayed indication is usually displayed in color. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The swing effect execution means may be the CPU 77AK131 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 based on step 05AKS01, for example. The peripheral area may be, for example, an outer frame display 05AKG2 during rocking. Displaying the peripheral area in normal colors may be performed, for example, in production execution examples 05AK12 and 05AK22.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and the swing effect, thereby improving the game interest.

a reserved storage means for storing information about variable display as a reserved memory; a reserved display means for making a reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory; and a specific display means for making a specific display corresponding to the variable display being executed, When the display is started, the specific display can be executed in a manner related to the reserved display corresponding to the variable display, and when the special effect is executed, the reserved display is displayed in a special color, and the specific display is displayed normally. May be displayed in color. Here, the pending storage means may be, for example, the pending display data storage unit AKM1. The pending display means may be, for example, the first pending display section AKB1, the second pending display section AKB2, or the like. The specific display means may be, for example, the active display section AKB0. The mode associated with the pending display may be, for example, the same shape as the pending display. The colors of the pending display and the specific display may be, for example, in the case of production execution examples 05AK31 and 05AK32.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the pending display and the specific display, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

When the swing performance is executed, the effect display can be executed across the specific region and the special region or the peripheral region, and when both the special performance and the swing performance are executed, the effect display can be displayed normally. May be displayed in color. Here, the effect display may be, for example, effect display 05AKG3. Displaying the effect display in normal colors may be used, for example, in the case of effect execution example 05AK12.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying appropriate effects.

A light emitting means for effecting a performance by light emission is provided, and when both the special performance and the advance notice performance are executed, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission color corresponding to the special performance, and both the special performance and the swing performance are executed. Sometimes, the light emitting means may be caused to emit light in a color corresponding to the swing effect. Here, the light emitting means may be, for example, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. The luminescent color corresponding to the special effect may be, for example, silver. The luminescent color corresponding to the swing effect may be, for example, blue.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game with an appropriate emission color.

When both the special performance and the swing performance are executed, the display displayed in the specific area during the execution of the swing performance does not have to be restored from the special color to the normal color. For example, control example 05AKC01 may be used.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and the swing effect to improve the game interest.

A special effect may be executed such that the display displayed in the specific area is changed from the normal color to the special color when the swing effect is being executed. For example, control example 05AKC02 may be used.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and the swing effect to improve the game interest.

The special effect executing means can execute a special effect of changing a plurality of effect displays displayed during the first period to a common color in the first period from the timing corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the starting area. and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state in a second period, and when both the special effect and the specific effect are executed, the first period is performed. and the second period may overlap, and the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in normal colors in the second period that does not overlap with the first period, and executes the specific effect in the second period that overlaps with the first period. It may be possible to execute a part of the specific effect in a common effect mode in the case of the normal color and the case of the special color by executing the color changed according to the special effect and the corresponding special color. . Here, the starting area may be, for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, or the like. The game medium may be, for example, a game ball. The first period may be, for example, a period from timing T01 to timing T02. The specific effect may be, for example, a battle zone effect. The second period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T12. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS19 and 77AKS52. The second period that does not overlap with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T02 to timing T12. Execution of the specific effect in normal colors may be performed, for example, when there is no color change effect. The second period that overlaps with the first period may be, for example, a period from timing T11 to timing T02. Execution of the specific effect with a special color may be, for example, in the case of a monochrome change or a golden color change due to a color change effect. A part of the specific effect may be, for example, a voice effect for outputting the music phrases PHA1 and PHA2.
In such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effects and the specific effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 06AK)
Regarding the characteristic part 06AK, when the execution of the color change effect is finished, the color recovery effect is executed. The color recovery effect is a effect that changes a plurality of effect displays that have been changed to special colors by the color change effect so as to restore the normal colors. For example, when the execution of the monochrome change in the color change effect is completed, a plurality of effect displays that have been changed to the grayscale display color that is the special color are changed to return to the normal display color that is the normal color. A color recovery effect is executed to cause the In addition, when the execution of the gold-based change in the color change effect is completed, the multiple effect displays that have been changed to the special gold-based display color are returned to the normal display color, which is the normal color. A changing color restoration effect is executed.

FIG. 11-11 shows, as a first execution example of the color recovery effect relating to the characteristic part 06AK, a case where it is possible to change the display area of the normal color sequentially from a part of the plurality of effect displays. The color recovery performance which changes the display area of the normal color sequentially from a part of the plurality of performance displays includes a plurality of types of performance contents with different positions for starting the change to the normal color. FIG. 11-11 shows production execution examples 06AK01 to 06AK03 in the case where the change to the normal color starts from the center position of the screen display and starts at the center of the screen. In addition to the case where the color recovery effect starts at the center of the screen, for example, there are cases where the right side of the screen starts from the right side of the screen display, and there are cases where the left side of the screen starts from the left side of the screen display. , it is sufficient if there are a plurality of types of presentation contents with different start positions. The color restoration effect is not limited to the start at the center of the screen, the start at the right side of the screen, and the start at the left side of the screen, and it is sufficient if there is a effect content that starts a change to the normal color from an arbitrary position on the screen display.

In the effect execution example 06AK01, due to the monochrome change in the color change effect, a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time are displayed in a grayscale display color that is a special color. , a change is initiated that leads to a return to normal colors. After that, in the effect execution example 06AK02, the return range to the normal color is increased more than the effect execution example 06AK01, and the display area of the normal color is expanded. Furthermore, in the production execution example 06AK03, the range of restoration to the normal color is increased more than in the production execution example 06AK02, so that the display area of the normal color is expanded. In this manner, by expanding the display area of the normal color, the range of restoration to the normal color is expanded so as to gradually increase from a part of the screen display to the entire screen display, thereby changing the display area by the color change effect. It is only necessary that the display colors of the plurality of effect displays gradually change from special colors to return to normal colors.

The color restoration effect, in which the display area of the normal color is changed sequentially from a part of the plurality of effect displays, is not limited to expanding the range of restoration to the normal color. In a mode of narrowing the display area of the color, it may be reduced so that the display range of the special color is reduced. As an example of a color restoration effect in which the display range of the special color is reduced so as to decrease, the restoration to the normal color is started from the peripheral area that is the edge of the screen display, and as time passes, it moves toward the center position of the screen display. As the return of the normal color progresses, the display range of the special color may be reduced so as to decrease. In addition, by advancing the range of restoration from the special color to the normal color in an arbitrary direction, such as up, down, left, or right, it is sufficient that some or all of the plurality of effect displays can be restored to the normal color in order.

FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13 show, as a second execution example of the color restoration effect relating to the characteristic portion 06AK, a special image having a color different from the color changed according to the color change effect, and displaying a plurality of effects. This shows the case where it is possible to change to a normal color. A performance image showing a character is displayed as a special image having a color different from the color changed according to the color change performance. The color recovery effect of displaying a special image and changing a plurality of effect displays to normal colors includes a plurality of types of effect contents in which characters displayed as special images are different. Also, the color restoration effect of displaying a special image and restoring a plurality of effect displays to the normal color includes a plurality of types of effect contents with different methods of changing to the normal color. The method of changing to normal color may include, for example, effect display and recovery range increase. The effect display is a method of displaying a performance image that is an effect image corresponding to the action of character display, covering the entire screen display, and then changing a plurality of performance displays to normal colors. Recovery range increase is a method of changing a plurality of effect displays to normal colors from the start position corresponding to the movement of the character display.

FIGS. 11-12 show production execution examples 06AK11 to 06AK13 in which the character 06CA is displayed as a production image showing the character as a special image, and is changed to a normal color by effect display. In the effect execution example 06AK11, the character 06CA is displayed, and the effect display is started at the display position corresponding to the movement of the character display. After that, in effect execution example 06AK12, the display size of the effect display is increased so as to be larger than in effect execution example 06AK11. Furthermore, in the effect execution example 06AK13, the display size of the effect display is enlarged so as to be larger than in the effect execution example 06AK12. The screen display is covered in the range of the effect display, and the display of the effect image cannot be visually recognized. However, display with high display priority, such as small pattern display and active display, may be displayed so as to be visible without being covered by the effect display. After such effect display covers the entire screen display, when the effect display is erased, the display colors of the plurality of effect displays changed by the color change effect change from the special color to the normal color. Just do it. In this way, after the performance image showing the character as the special image is displayed, the effect display covering the plurality of performance displays is executed, and then the plurality of performance displays can be changed so as to return to the normal color.

FIGS. 11-13 show rendering execution examples 06AK14 to 06AK16 in which the character 06CB is displayed as a rendering image representing the character serving as the special image, and changes to normal colors due to the increase in the recovery range. In the effect execution example 06AK14, the character 06CB is displayed, and at the start position corresponding to the movement of the character display, the change to return to the normal color is started. After that, in the effect execution example 06AK15, the range of restoration to the normal color is increased more than the effect execution example 06AK14, and the normal color display area is expanded. Furthermore, in the effect execution example 06AK16, the range of restoration to the normal color is increased compared to the effect execution example 06AK15, and the normal color display area is expanded. In this manner, in a mode in which the display area of the normal color is expanded, the change to return to the normal color is started from the start position accompanying the character display operation, and the range of return to the normal color is in order from a part of the screen display. By enlarging so as to gradually increase to all, the display colors of the plurality of effect displays changed by the color change effect may be changed so as to return from the special color to the normal color.

FIGS. 11-14 show a case where all of the plurality of effect displays can be changed step by step to the normal color as a third execution example of the color recovery effect for the characteristic portion 06AK. The color restoration effect, in which all of the multiple effect displays are changed to normal colors in stages, uses color blend image processing, for example, to change display colors from grayscale or gold to normal colors over time. It is sufficient if the content of the presentation changes so as to restore the entire screen display by pressing the button. FIG. 11-14 shows production execution examples 06AK21 to 06AK23 in the case of changing a plurality of production displays that have changed to grayscale display colors due to the monochrome change in the color change production so as to return to normal colors in stages. there is

In the effect execution example 06AK21, the normal color display color is color-blended at a ratio of, for example, 25% with respect to the grayscale display color due to the monochrome change, so that all of the plurality of effect displays are converted to the normal color. Restorative change has begun. After that, in production execution example 06AK22, the normal color display color is color-blended at a ratio of, for example, 50% with respect to the grayscale display color due to the monochrome change. It is more advanced than production execution example 06AK21. Furthermore, in the effect execution example 06AK23, the normal color display color is color blended at a ratio of, for example, 75% with respect to the grayscale display color due to the monochrome change, so that the change to return to the normal color is performed. It is more advanced than the effect execution example 06AK22. It should be noted that the ratio of color blending of display colors that are normal colors with respect to grayscale display colors due to monochrome change may be changed discretely or continuously according to the passage of the rendering time in the color recovery rendering. can be changed.

After a plurality of presentation displays displayed at the same time are changed from normal colors to common special colors by color change presentation, there is room for improvement in presentation to return to normal colors. Therefore, in the first execution example of the color restoration effect regarding the characteristic part 06AK, it is possible to change the display area of the normal color sequentially from a part of the plurality of effect displays. Further, in the second execution example of the color restoration effect relating to the characteristic portion 06AK, a special image having a color different from the color changed according to the color change effect is displayed, and the plurality of effect displays can be changed to the normal color. Furthermore, in the third execution example of the color restoration effect relating to the characteristic portion 06AK, all of the plurality of effect displays can be changed step by step to the normal color. By enabling these color restoration effects to be executed, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the effect of returning to the normal color, thereby improving the interest in the game. It should be noted that the color recovery effect related to the characteristic portion 06AK is not limited to being executable in all of the first to third execution examples, but is partially executable in the first to third execution examples. It may be

Regarding the characterizing part 06AK, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the display color while executing the variable display of the decoration pattern. For example, in the notice after establishment of reach, the message display color notice corresponding to the notice type of "display color notice" can be executed at a predetermined rate. When the execution of the color change performance is finished, the plurality of performance displays are changed from the special color to the normal color along with the execution of the color recovery performance. When such a color recovery effect and a notice effect such as a message display color notice are executed together, the display color of the notice effect becomes visible as the color recovery effect progresses.

FIGS. 11-15 show the case where both the color restoration effect and the message display color notice are executed for the characteristic portion 06AK. The execution of the color change effect may end after the ready-to-win state is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode in the variable display for target variation. When the execution of such a color change effect is completed, the color recovery effect is executed, and the message display color notice can be executed during the period in which the plurality of effect displays are changed from the special color to the normal color. be. FIGS. 11-15 show production execution examples 06AK51 to 06AK53 in the case where the change to return to the normal color is screen center start starting from the center position of the screen display.

In the case of effect execution example 06AK51, at the center position of the screen display, a change to return to the normal color radially starts. However, since the display area in which the normal color is restored is narrow, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display color of the character image in the message display color notice. After that, in the effect execution example 06AK52, the range of restoration to the normal color is increased more than the effect execution example 06AK51, and the display area of the normal color is expanded. As a result, the range in which the player can visually recognize the display color of the character image in the message display color notice is also increased, making it easier to recognize the display color of the notice effect. Furthermore, in the production execution example 06AK53, the range of restoration to the normal color is increased more than in the production execution example 06AK52, and the display area of the normal color is expanded. In this way, the player can visually recognize the display color of the character image in the message display color notice step by step. Therefore, when the range of restoration to the normal color is gradually increased from a part of the screen display to the whole, and the display area of the normal color is expanded, the display colors of the plurality of effect displays changed by the color change effect are displayed. , the special color should be changed back to the normal color.

In addition, it is not limited to the case where the display area of the normal color is expanded so that the range of returning to the normal color gradually increases from a part of the screen display to the whole, and the color changed according to the color change effect When it is possible to change a plurality of performance displays so as to return to normal colors by displaying special images of different colors, or when it is possible to change all of the plurality of performance displays to return to normal colors in stages. Alternatively, when a notice effect such as a message display color notice is executed together, the display color of the notice effect may become visible as the color recovery effect progresses. In this way, the display color of the notice effect becomes visible as the color recovery effect progresses, so that the color recovery effect and the notice effect are appropriately executed so as to increase the player's attention to the notice effect. , can improve the game interest.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step AKS013 of FIG. 10-11 as the advance notice effect determination processing. In the notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-16, similarly to the case shown in FIGS. 10-13, the notice during all pattern fluctuations is decided, and it is possible to determine whether or not it is the target change of the color change effect. (Steps 77AKS31 to 77AKS36). If it is the target variation of color change effect at step 77AKS36 (step 77AKS36; Yes), the type and pattern of color recovery effect are determined (step 06AKS01). The pattern of color recovery rendering is also called a color recovery pattern. At step 06AKS01, one of the color restoration types 06PA to 06PC is determined. The color recovery type 06PA corresponds to the color recovery effect of the first execution example, which can be changed by sequentially expanding the display area of the normal color from a part of the plurality of effect displays. The color recovery type 06PB corresponds to the color recovery effect of the second execution example in which a special image such as a effect image showing a character is displayed and a plurality of effect displays can be changed to normal colors. The color recovery type 06PC corresponds to the color recovery effect of the third execution example in which all of the plurality of effect displays can be changed step by step to the normal color. After that, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 10-13, the advance notice after establishment of reach is determined (steps 77AKS37 to 77AKS39).

FIG. 11-17(A) shows a setting example 06AKP1 of a color restoration pattern that can be determined corresponding to the color restoration type 06PA. In setting example 06AKP1, color restoration patterns 06PA01 to 06PA04, 06PA11 to 06PA14, and 06PA21 to 06PA24 are provided, in which some or all of a plurality of types of presentation modes, such as start timing, presentation period, and presentation content, are different as a plurality of color recovery patterns. are prepared in advance. The start timing designates the timing at which the execution of the color change effect ends and the execution of the color recovery effect starts. The effect period designates the period during which the color recovery effect is executed. As for the content of the effect, any one of starting at the center of the screen, starting at the right side of the screen, and starting at the left side of the screen is specified. In addition, a plurality of color restoration patterns having arbitrary different effects may be prepared corresponding to the color restoration type 06PA.

In the color restoration pattern 06PA01, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting at the center of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA02, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting at the center of the screen. In the color restoration pattern 06PA03, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting at the center of the screen. In the color restoration pattern 06PA04, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting at the center of the screen. In the color restoration pattern 06PA11, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the right side of the screen. In the color restoration pattern 06PA12, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the right side of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA13, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the right side of the screen. In the color restoration pattern 06PA14, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode of starting on the right side of the screen. In the color recovery pattern 06PA21, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode that starts on the left side of the screen. In the color restoration pattern 06PA22, the start timing is the timing T061, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode that starts on the left side of the screen. In the color restoration pattern 06PA23, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 3 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode that starts on the left side of the screen. In the color restoration pattern 06PA24, the start timing is the timing T062, the effect period is 5 seconds, and the effect content is the effect mode that starts on the left side of the screen.

FIG. 11-17(B) shows a setting example 06AKP2 of a color restoration pattern that can be determined corresponding to the color restoration type 06PB. In setting example 06AKP2, color recovery patterns 06PB01 to 06PB04 are prepared in advance as a plurality of color recovery patterns, in which a plurality of types of presentation modes such as start timing, presentation period, and presentation content are partially or entirely different. The start timing and presentation period are the same as in the case of the color recovery type 06PA. The effect content specifies the effect image showing the character and the method of changing to the normal color. In addition, a plurality of color restoration patterns having arbitrary different effects may be prepared corresponding to the color restoration type 06PB.

The color recovery pattern 06PB01 has a start timing of timing T061, a presentation period of 3 seconds, and a presentation mode of character 06CA and effect display. The color recovery pattern 06PB02 has a start timing of timing T061, a presentation period of 5 seconds, and a presentation mode of character 06CA and increased recovery range. The color recovery pattern 06PB03 has a start timing of timing T062, a presentation period of 3 seconds, and a presentation mode of character 06CB and effect display. The color recovery pattern 06PB04 has a start timing of timing T062, an effect period of 5 seconds, and an effect mode of character 06CB and increased recovery range.

FIG. 11-17(C) shows a setting example 06AKP3 of a color restoration pattern that can be determined corresponding to the color restoration type 06PC. In setting example 06AKP3, color restoration patterns 06PC01 to 06PC04 are prepared in advance as a plurality of color restoration patterns, in which a plurality of types of rendering modes such as start timing and rendering period are partially or entirely different. The color restoration patterns 06PC01 to 06PC04 corresponding to the color restoration type 06PC may all share a part of the rendering mode in that the rendering contents are uniform over the entire screen. A plurality of color restoration patterns with different optional effects may be prepared corresponding to the color restoration type 06PC.

The color recovery pattern 06PC01 has a start timing of timing T061 and a presentation mode of 3 seconds for the presentation period. The color recovery pattern 06PC02 has a start timing of timing T061 and a rendering period of 5 seconds. The color restoration pattern 06PC03 has a start timing at the timing T062 and a rendering period of 3 seconds. The color restoration pattern 06PC04 has a start timing of timing T062 and a presentation mode of 5 seconds for the presentation period.

FIGS. 11-18 show a determination example 06AKD1 for determining the type of color restoration effect. In step 06AKS01 of the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-16, for example, a random value for color restoration type determination is used to refer to the color restoration type determination table, and match the random value according to the variable display result. The color restoration type, which is the type of color restoration effect, may be determined by determining the determination result to which the determination value to be applied is assigned. In decision example 06AKD1, the decision rate of the color recovery type differs depending on whether the variable display result is "loss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "loss", the decision rate of the color recovery type 06PA is the highest, whereas when the variable display result is "big hit", the decision rate of the color recovery type 06PC is the highest. highest. With such a setting, when the color restoration effect corresponding to the color restoration type 06PC is executed, the expectation for the big win is high. In this way, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs between when the color recovery type is the first type and when it is the second type, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the color recovery effect and improve the amusement of the game. can.

FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20 show examples of determination of color restoration patterns corresponding to determination results of color restoration types. FIGS. 11-19 show a determination example 06AKD2 when determining a color restoration pattern corresponding to the color restoration type 06PA. FIG. 11-20(A) shows a determination example 06AKD3 when determining a color restoration pattern corresponding to the color restoration type 06PB. FIG. 11-20(B) shows a determination example 06AKD4 when determining a color restoration pattern corresponding to the color restoration type 06PC. In step 06AKS01 of the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-16, for example, a random value for color restoration pattern determination is used to refer to the color restoration pattern determination table corresponding to the determination result of the color restoration type, and the color change is performed. A color recovery pattern may be determined by determining a determination result to which a determination value matching a random number value is assigned according to the effect or variable display result. In decision examples 06AKD2 to 06AKD4, the decision rate of the color recovery pattern when the color change effect is a monochrome change or a gold color change, and when the variable display result is "losing" or "big hit" is different. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win according to the effect mode for each color recovery pattern differs between when the color change effect is a monochrome change and when it is a gold color change. As a result, the player's expectation for the color recovery performance is different depending on whether the color change performance is a monochrome change or a golden color change, thereby making the player pay attention to the color recovery performance. It is possible to increase the degree and improve the amusement of the game.

A color recovery pattern may be determined so that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to an arbitrary presentation mode in the color recovery presentation. For example, effect contents that can be set in common for color recovery types 06PA to 06PC, different effect contents for each of color recovery types 06PA to 06PC, arbitrary effect images displayed when color recovery effects are executed, etc. , if any of the shape, color, or pattern shown in part or all is different, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is different. may be

For example, in the decision example 06AKD2 shown in FIGS. 11-19, both when the color change effect is monochrome change and when it is gold color change, the variable display result is "big hit" rather than "losing". , the rate of determination of the color restoration patterns 06PA01 to 06PA04 increases. All of the color restoration patterns 06PA01 to 06PA04 include the content of the effect that starts at the center of the screen. Therefore, when the change that returns to the normal color due to the color recovery effect is the start of the screen center that starts from the center position of the screen display, the big hit is expected more than the case of the start on the right side of the screen or the start on the left side of the screen. degree increases.

FIG. 11-21 is a flow chart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S172 of the effect control process shown in FIG. The effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 11-21 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-15 except for steps 06AKS11 to 06AKS13. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 11-21, it is determined whether or not the color change effect is being executed (step 06AKS11). Then, when the color change effect is being performed (step 06AKS11; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the color recovery effect period (step 06AKS12). The color restoration effect period may be set according to the determination result of the color restoration pattern. If it is the color recovery effect period (step 06AKS12; Yes), control is performed to execute the color recovery effect (step 06AKS13). At step 06AKS13, the CPU 77AK131 supplies the VDP 77AK132 with a drawing command to control the display when executing the color restoration effect. Note that the color recovery effect period is not limited to the period set during the color change effect, and may be a period set corresponding to the end of the color change effect such as after the end of the color change effect.

FIG. 11-22 shows a control example 06AKC01 of the period and timing for executing the color restoration effect upon completion of the color change effect. Regarding the characteristic part 06AK, the color change effect ends when the special color returns to the normal color by the color recovery effect in the variable display that becomes the target variation. Execution of the color restoration effect is started at either timing T061 or T062 according to the determination result of the color restoration pattern. When the execution of the color recovery effect is started at the timing T061, if the effect period of the color recovery pattern is 3 seconds, the color recovery effect is executed in the period TD11. When the execution of the color recovery effect is started at the timing T061, if the effect period of the color recovery pattern is 5 seconds, the color recovery effect is executed in the period TD12. When the execution of the color recovery effect is started at the timing T062, if the effect period of the color recovery pattern is 3 seconds, the color recovery effect is executed in the period TD21. When the execution of the color recovery effect is started at the timing T062, if the effect period of the color recovery pattern is 5 seconds, the color recovery effect is executed in the period TD22. For example, the periods TD21 and TD22 include an announcement performance period during which an announcement is made after the ready-to-win state is established. Therefore, when the color recovery effect is executed in either period TD21 or TD22, both the color recovery effect and the message display color notice may be executed together. can be visually recognized by the player step by step. In this way, when the notice effect such as the message display color notice is executed, the display color of the notice effect becomes visible as the color recovery effect progresses. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved by appropriately executing the color recovery effect and the notice effect so as to increase the player's attention to the notice effect.

The notice effect that the display color becomes visible as the color recovery effect progresses is not limited to the notice after the reach is established such as the message display color notice, for example, the notice during all pattern changes such as the step-up notice, and other variable displays. Any advance notice effect that can be executed during the period in which is executed may be used. A part or all of the periods TD11 and TD12 shown in FIGS. 11-22 may include a part or all of the notice effect period during which the notice during all symbol fluctuation is executed. When the color recovery performance is executed in either period TD11 or TD12, both the color recovery performance and the advance notice during all pattern fluctuations are executed.

After the special color returns to the normal color by the color recovery effect, it is possible to execute any display color effect with a different degree of expectation for a big hit depending on the display color, such as a button effect included in the reach effect of super reach. good too. Since such a display color effect is executed after returning to the normal color, the player can easily recognize the display color from the start of the effect. As a result, the color recovery effect and the display color effect are appropriately executed so as to increase the player's expectation for the big win game state, thereby improving the game interest.

FIG. 11-23 shows an effect execution example when the color recovery effect is executed and the golden color change in the color change effect is started along with the end of the monochrome change in the color change effect. In this way, the effect of changing again the colors of the plurality of effect displays that are changed so as to return to the normal colors by the color recovery effect is also referred to as a re-change effect. For example, when the variable display is started during the period in which the monochrome change is executed in the color change effect, whether the judgment result of winning stored in the pending display data storage unit AKM1 includes "big win". determine whether or not At this time, if a "big hit" is included, it is determined whether or not there is a re-change effect. Then, when it is determined that "with effect" for executing the re-change effect, a re-change type and a re-change pattern similar to the color recovery class and color recovery pattern are determined. FIG. 11-23 shows production execution examples 06AK101 to 06AK103 when a re-change type similar to the color recovery type 06PA is determined and a re-change pattern similar to the color recovery pattern 06PA01 is determined.

In the effect execution example 06AK101, due to the monochrome change in the color change effect, during the period when multiple effect displays displayed at the same time are displayed in a grayscale display color that is a special color, from the center position of the screen display, A radial change is initiated which results in a return to the normal color. Within the range of restoration where the colors return to normal, a new color change effect begins, in which multiple display colors change to a special gold display color due to the gold color change. It is After that, in production execution example 06AK102, the range of return to the normal color increases more than in production execution example 06AK101, and the display area of the normal color is expanded so as to expand. The range of re-changes to color has also been expanded to increase. Furthermore, in production execution example 06AK103, the range of return to the normal color is increased more than in production execution example 06AK102, and the display area of the normal color is expanded so as to expand. The range of re-changes to color has also been expanded to increase. In this way, it may be possible to execute a re-change effect in which the colors of a plurality of effect displays that are changed so as to return to the normal colors by the color recovery effect are changed again. To improve amusement in a game by appropriately executing a color change performance and a color recovery performance so that a player's attention to a re-change performance in which the color change performance and the color recovery performance are combined is heightened thereby. can be done.

The re-changing effect that can be executed together with the execution of the color recovery effect is to change all of the plurality of effect displays from the first special color to the normal color in order, and part of the plurality of effect displays. It is sufficient if all of the colors can be changed from the normal color to the second special color in order. Alternatively, the re-change effect executable together with the execution of the color recovery effect displays a special image with a color different from the first special color, and changes the plurality of effect displays from the first special color to the normal color. At the same time, it may be possible to change the plurality of effect displays from the normal color to the second special color. The re-changing effect that can be executed together with the color recovery effect is to change all of the plurality of effect displays step by step so as to return from the first special color to the normal color, and to gradually change all of the plurality of effect displays. It may be changeable from a normal color to a second special color.

The re-change effect is not limited to changing to the special color again after the color recovery effect to restore the normal color, and the first special color to the second special color without restoring the normal color. It may be changed. For example, when the monochrome change in the color change effect ends, the golden change in the color change effect may be started instead of executing the color recovery effect. When executing such a re-change effect, it may be possible to change from a part of the plurality of effect displays to all in order by expanding the display area from the first special color to the second special color. When executing the re-change effect, a special image having a color different from the first special color may be displayed, and the plurality of effect displays may be changed from the first special color to the second special color. When executing the re-change effect, all of the plurality of effect displays may be changed stepwise from the first special color to the second special color.

FIGS. 11-24 show an effect execution example for a modification when a color change effect is started. When the color change effect is started, an effect image serving as an effect image for the change start effect may be displayed. The effect display by displaying the effect image for the effect at the start of change is started from a predetermined position in the screen display, and the display range is increased so as to sequentially cover a part of the plurality of effect displays. should be enlarged to When the display size increases until the effect display when the color change effect is started sequentially covers from part to all of the plurality of effect displays, for example, part or all of the range covered by the effect display is made transparent. By the drawing process, it is also possible to visibly display that some or all of the plurality of effect displays on the screen display are displayed in normal colors. After the effect display covers the entire screen display, the effect display of the covering range may be temporarily changed to make it difficult to visually recognize, and then the effect display changed to a special color by the color change effect may be started. . FIG. 11-24 shows production execution examples 06AKA1 to 06AKA4 when the effect display is started from the center position of the screen.

In the effect execution example 06AKA1, the effect display covering the effect display is started at the center position of the screen display. At this time, in the coverage range of the effect display, it can be visually recognized that the covered effect display is displayed in normal colors. In the effect execution example 06AKA2, the area covered by the effect display is enlarged so as to be larger than in the effect execution example 06AKA1. Since the coverage of the effect display has not yet reached the entire screen display, it can be visually recognized that the covered effect display is displayed in normal colors. After that, in the effect execution example 06AKA3, the coverage range of the effect display reaches the entire screen display, and changes such that the covered effect display becomes difficult to see. Subsequently, in the effect execution example 06AKA4, the monochrome change in the color change effect is started with the end of the effect display. In this way, the color change effect may be started after covering a plurality of effect displays with the effect display. The effect display progresses so as to sequentially cover a part of the plurality of presentation displays and all of them, and it may be possible to visually recognize that the covered presentation displays are displayed in normal colors. After changing the performance display covered by the effect display so that it cannot be visually recognized, execution of the color change performance may be started to change the performance display to a special color.

Whether or not to execute the color change performance of changing the normal color to the special color by the effect display may be determined based on the variable display result or the like in the variable display being executed when the start winning is generated. For example, when the variable display result in the variable display being executed is "failed", it is determined that the color change effect of changing the normal color to the special color by the effect display can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, when the variable display result in the variable display being executed is "big hit", it is determined not to execute the color change performance of changing the normal color to the special color by the effect display. In this way, the variable display result in the variable display being executed is a "big hit", and the range in which it is controlled to the big win game state is determined, and the color change performance of changing the normal color to the special color by effect display is not executed. may be set as a limit. In addition, when executing a production with a high expectation of a big hit in the variable display being executed, the color change production that changes the normal color to the special color by the effect display is not executed, or the execution ratio of such a color change production is changed. A limit may be provided as a limit, such as lowering. When a player's expectation for a big win game state is heightened by these restrictions, the color change performance is properly executed so as to prevent the color change performance from interfering with other performances, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

A color change effect that changes a normal color to a special color by an effect display changes a plurality of effect displays from normal colors to special colors when the effect display visibly covers a part or all of the plurality of effect displays. may As in the example 06AKA2 of the effect execution, when the effect display partially or entirely covered with the effect display can be seen through the effect display, the effect display may be changed from the normal color to the special color.

When the execution of the color change effect is finished, the plurality of effect displays changed to the special color may be returned to the normal color without executing the color recovery effect. For example, when the ready-to-win state is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is a ready-to-win mode, the execution of the color change performance is immediately terminated, so that the plurality of performance displays changed to the special color are returned to the normal color. It should be noted that the execution of the color change effect may be immediately terminated when a specific notice effect such as a reach notice is executed, for example, without being limited to the time when the reach condition is established. After that, the notice can be executed after the ready-to-win is established, so that the display color in the notice effect such as the message display color notice may be made easier for the player to visually recognize the display color from the beginning of the notice effect. As a result, the color change effect and the notice effect can be appropriately executed so that the player can easily recognize the display color of the notice effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

When starting execution of the color change effect, it may be possible to change from a part of the plurality of effect displays to all in order from the normal color to the special color. When starting execution of the color change effect, a special image having a color different from the special color may be displayed, and the plurality of effect displays may be changed from the normal color to the special color. When starting execution of the color change effect, all of the plurality of effect displays may be able to be changed in stages from the normal color to the special color.

In the production execution examples 06AK11 to 06AK13 of the color recovery production that restores the normal color by the effect display shown in FIGS. Part or all of the effect display may be displayed in a special color so that it can be visually recognized. After the effect display covers the entire screen display, the effect display in the covered range may be temporarily changed to make it difficult to visually recognize, and then the effect display may be started in which normal colors are restored by the color recovery effect. . In the color recovery effect of returning to the normal color by the effect display, when the effect display visibly covers a part or all of the plurality of effect displays, the plurality of effect displays may be changed from the special color to the normal color. . As in the effect execution example 06AK12, when the effect display partially or entirely covered by the effect display can be seen through the effect display, the effect display may be returned from the special color to the normal color.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 06AK)
A game machine which performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player, and can execute a special performance of changing a plurality of performance displays displayed at the same time from normal colors to common special colors. A special performance execution means and a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance of changing a plurality of performance displays changed to special colors by the special performance to normal colors are provided, and one of the plurality of performance displays is provided in the specific performance. It is possible to change the display area of the normal color sequentially from the part. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The special effect may be, for example, a color change effect. The special effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes steps 77AKS06 and 77AKS42. The specific effect may be, for example, a color recovery effect. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, CPU77AK131 that executes step 06AKS13. For example, the effect execution examples 06AK01 to 06AK03 may be changed in such a manner that the display area of the normal color is expanded in sequence.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special effects and the specific effects, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In the specific effect, a special image having a color different from the color changed according to the special effect may be displayed, and the plurality of effect displays may be changed to the normal color. Here, the special image may be, for example, an effect image of the characters 06CA and 06CB. The fact that the colors can be changed to the normal color is sufficient in the case of the production execution examples 06AK11 to 06AK16, for example.
In such a configuration, the special effect and the specific effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game interest.

In the specific effect, all of the plurality of effect displays may be changed step by step to the normal color. Here, being able to change to the normal color may be, for example, the case of the production execution examples 06AK21 to 06AK23.
In such a configuration, the special effect and the specific effect can be appropriately executed to improve the game interest.

A notice performance executing means capable of executing notice performances with different expectations controlled to an advantageous state according to the display color is provided, and when the specific performance and the notice performance are executed together, the notice performance follows the progress of the specific performance. display color may be visible. Here, the notice effect may be, for example, a display color notice. The advance notice effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes step AKS033. The display color of the notice effect can be visually recognized in the case of effect execution examples 06AK51 to 06AK53, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the specific effect and the advance notice effect to improve the game interest.

In the specific effect, when the display area of the normal color is changed sequentially from a part of the plurality of effect displays, the restoration may be performed in one of the plurality of return modes. Here, the plurality of return modes may be, for example, the start timing is timing T061 or T062, the effect period is 3 seconds or 5 seconds, and the effect content is start at the center of the screen, start at the right side of the screen, or start at the left side of the screen.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the specific effect and improve the game interest.

In the specific effect, after the special image is displayed and then the effect display covering the plurality of effect displays is executed, the plurality of effect displays may be changed to the normal color. Here, it suffices that the effect display is executed, for example, in the case of effect execution example 06AK13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the specific effect and improve the game interest.

A re-change effect executing means capable of executing a re-change effect of changing again the colors of the plurality of effect displays that are changed to normal colors by the specific effect may be provided. Here, the re-change effect may be, for example, the case of the effect execution examples 06AK101 to 06AK103. The re-change effect executing means may be, for example, the CPU 77AK131 that executes step 77AKS06.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the specific effect and the re-change effect to improve the game interest.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 5... Image display device 9... Game effect lamp 77AK100... Effect control microprocessor 77AK131... CPU
77AK132 … VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect of changing a plurality of effect displays displayed at the same time from normal colors to common special colors;
reserved storage means for storing information about variable display as a reserved memory; reserved display means for performing reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory; and specific display means for performing specific display corresponding to the variable display being executed;
The suspension display means displays the suspension display in a special color when the special effect is executed,
The specific display means is
capable of executing a specific display in a manner associated with the pending display corresponding to the variable display when the variable display is initiated;
As a normal color, it is possible to display a specific display by the first mode and the second mode, which is controlled to the advantageous state more than the first mode, and which is expected to be in a more advantageous state,
displaying the specific display of the first mode in a special color when the special effect is executed;
displaying the specific display of the second mode while maintaining it in the second mode when the special effect is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images